OSN 550 V100R006C01 Hardware Description 01

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System V100R006C01
Hardware Description
Issue Date 01 2012-10-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System Hardware Description
About This Document
About This Document

Product Version
The following table lists the product versions applicable to this documentation. Product Name OptiX OSN 550 iManager U2000 Product Version V100R006C01 V100R008C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the OptiX OSN 550 in terms of hardware architecture, boards, cables. This document is intended for: l l Network planning engineers Hardware installation engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Alerts you to a high risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in serious injury or death. Alerts you to a medium or low risk hazard that could, if not avoided, result in moderate or minor injury. Alerts you to a potentially hazardous situation that could, if not avoided, result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
About This Document
Symbol
Description Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points in the main text.
GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Meaning Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the changes made in earlier issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

This document is the first issue for product version V100R006C01. Compared with issue 1 of product version V100R006C00, this issue incorporates the following updates: l l l l Added the 1x10GE Ethernet processing board EX1. Added the 4xchannelized STM-1 service processing board CQ1. Optimized the "Functions and Features" section of the system control, switching, and timing board. Optimized the "Functions and Features" sections of the packet processing boards.
Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

This issue is used for first office application (FOA).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
iii
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Chassis.............................................................................................................................................1 2 Boards and Their Appearances...................................................................................................5
2.1 Board List...........................................................................................................................................................6 2.2 Board Appearance............................................................................................................................................14
3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards...................................................................18

3.1 PCX..................................................................................................................................................................19 3.1.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................19 3.1.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................20 3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................36 3.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................40 3.1.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................42 3.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................45 3.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................46 3.1.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................47 3.2 CXL..................................................................................................................................................................58 3.2.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................58 3.2.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................59 3.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................61 3.2.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................64 3.2.5 DIP Switches and CF Card......................................................................................................................66 3.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................69 3.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................69 3.2.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................70
4 Packet Processing Boards...........................................................................................................77

4.1 EF8F.................................................................................................................................................................78 4.1.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................78 4.1.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................78 4.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................82 4.1.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................84 4.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers......................................................................................................................85 4.1.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................85 Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv
Contents
4.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................85 4.1.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................85 4.2 EM6T/EM6F....................................................................................................................................................87 4.2.1 Version Description.................................................................................................................................87 4.2.2 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................88 4.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow........................................................................................................93 4.2.4 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................95 4.2.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers......................................................................................................................98 4.2.6 Valid Slots...............................................................................................................................................98 4.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................98 4.2.8 Technical Specifications..........................................................................................................................98 4.3 EG4C..............................................................................................................................................................105 4.3.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................105 4.3.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................105 4.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................110 4.3.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................112 4.3.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................115 4.3.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................115 4.3.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................115 4.3.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................115 4.4 EX1.................................................................................................................................................................121 4.4.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................121 4.4.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................121 4.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................126 4.4.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................128 4.4.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................129 4.4.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................129 4.4.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................129 4.4.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................129 4.5 MD1................................................................................................................................................................131 4.5.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................131 4.5.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................131 4.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................134 4.5.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................136 4.5.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................139 4.5.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................139 4.5.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................139 4.5.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................139 4.6 CQ1.................................................................................................................................................................140 4.6.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................140 4.6.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................140 4.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................143 Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
Contents
4.6.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................146 4.6.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................147 4.6.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................147 4.6.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................147 4.6.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................147
5 SDH Boards................................................................................................................................150
5.1 SL1D...............................................................................................................................................................151 5.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................151 5.1.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................151 5.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................152 5.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................154 5.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................155 5.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................155 5.1.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................155 5.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................156 5.2 SL1Q...............................................................................................................................................................158 5.2.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................158 5.2.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................158 5.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................160 5.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................162 5.2.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................163 5.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................163 5.2.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................163 5.2.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................164 5.3 SL4D...............................................................................................................................................................166 5.3.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................166 5.3.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................166 5.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................168 5.3.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................170 5.3.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................171 5.3.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................171 5.3.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................171 5.3.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................172
6 PDH Boards................................................................................................................................175
6.1 SP3D...............................................................................................................................................................176 6.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................176 6.1.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................176 6.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................176 6.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................179 6.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................182 6.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................182 6.1.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................182 Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi
Contents
6.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................182 6.2 PL3T...............................................................................................................................................................184 6.2.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................184 6.2.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................184 6.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................184 6.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................186 6.2.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................187 6.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................187 6.2.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................187 6.2.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................187
7 EoS Boards..................................................................................................................................189
7.1 EFS8...............................................................................................................................................................190 7.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................190 7.1.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................190 7.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................192 7.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................194 7.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................196 7.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................196 7.1.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................196 7.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................197 7.2 EGT1..............................................................................................................................................................197 7.2.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................197 7.2.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................197 7.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................199 7.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................201 7.2.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................202 7.2.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................202 7.2.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................202 7.2.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................202
8 WDM Board................................................................................................................................206
8.1 DMD2.............................................................................................................................................................207 8.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................207 8.1.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................207 8.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................207 8.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................208 8.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................209 8.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................209 8.1.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................209 8.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................209
9 Auxiliary Boards........................................................................................................................212
9.1 AUX................................................................................................................................................................213 Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
9.1.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................213 9.1.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................213 9.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................213 9.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................215 9.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers....................................................................................................................219 9.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................219 9.1.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................219 9.1.8 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................219 9.2 FAN................................................................................................................................................................221 9.2.1 Version Description...............................................................................................................................222 9.2.2 Functions and Features..........................................................................................................................222 9.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow......................................................................................................222 9.2.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................223 9.2.5 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................224 9.2.6 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................225
10 Power Boards............................................................................................................................226
10.1 UPM..............................................................................................................................................................227 10.1.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................227 10.1.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................227 10.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................228 10.1.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................229 10.1.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................231 10.1.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................231 10.2 PIU................................................................................................................................................................232 10.2.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................232 10.2.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................233 10.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................233 10.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................234 10.2.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................236 10.2.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................236 10.3 APIU.............................................................................................................................................................236 10.3.1 Version Description.............................................................................................................................236 10.3.2 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................236 10.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow....................................................................................................237 10.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................238 10.3.5 Valid Slots...........................................................................................................................................239 10.3.6 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................239
11 Outdoor Cabinet......................................................................................................................240 12 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................243

12.1 Functions......................................................................................................................................................244 12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots.........................................................................................................................244 Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
Contents
13 Optical Attenuators.................................................................................................................246 14 Pluggable Optical Modules...................................................................................................248

14.1 Overview......................................................................................................................................................249 14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules..........................................................................................................250 14.3 XFP Optical Modules...................................................................................................................................254 14.4 CWDM/DWDM...........................................................................................................................................255
15 Pluggable electrical Modules................................................................................................269 16 Cables.........................................................................................................................................271

16.1 Fiber Jumper.................................................................................................................................................273 16.2 DC Power Cable...........................................................................................................................................274 16.3 AC Power Cable...........................................................................................................................................275 16.4 UPM Power Cable........................................................................................................................................275 16.5 PGND Cable.................................................................................................................................................277 16.6 STM-1 Cable................................................................................................................................................277 16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable............................................................................................................................................278 16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable............................................................................................................................................282 16.9 E3/T3 Cable..................................................................................................................................................287 16.10 Network Cable............................................................................................................................................288
17 Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................293 A Glossary......................................................................................................................................294
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
ix
1 Chassis
1
Chassis Structure
Chassis
The OptiX OSN 550 is a 2U chassis. It can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of cabinets and surfaces.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
1 Chassis
Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area
H D W
Board installation area
SLOT SLOT 10 91 SLOT (PIU) SLOT (PIU) 11 93 SLOT (FAN) SLOT (FAN) 9 92 (PIU) (PIU)
SLOT 7 (CST/CSH) SLOT 7 SLOT 5 (EXT) SLOT 5 (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) SLOT 3 (EXT) SLOT 1 (EXT ) SLOT 1 (EXT)
SLOT 8 (CST/CSH) SLOT 8 SLOT 6 6 (EXT) SLOT (EXT) SLOT 4 4 (EXT) SLOT (EXT) SLOT 2 2 (EXT ) SLOT (EXT)
2 3
1 Power supply boards 2

NOTE
Fan board
3 4
Extended boards System control, switching, and timing boards
An OptiX OSN 550 NE can automatically save its NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask to its backplane. After a new system control, switching, and timing board replaces an original one, the NE automatically uses the saved information. Therefore, you do not need to set the NE ID, extended ID, IP address, and subnet mask for the substitute board.
Installation Mode
The equipment can be deployed in a variety of scenarios and on several different types of cabinets and surfaces. such as in an ETSI or 19-inch cabinet, APM30H outdoor cabinet, or open rack, or on a wall or desk.
Label Description
Table 1-1 provides the description of the labels on the chassis and boards. Actual labels may vary depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2
1 Chassis
Table 1-1 Description of labels Label Label Name ESD protection label Description Indicates that the equipment is sensitive to static electricity. Indicates the grounding position of the chassis. Warns you not to touch fan leaves when the fan is rotating. Instructs you to read related instructions before performing any power-related tasks. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum optical power of the optical port is less than 10 dBm (10 mW). Indicates that the equipment has been quality checked.
Grounding label
Fan warning label
Power caution label
CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT
Laser safety class label
/ QUALIFICATION CARD
Qualification card label
HUAWEI
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.
MADE IN CHINA
RoHS label
50
Indicates that the equipment contains certain hazardous substances specified in the RoHS directive. The equipment needs to be recycled after the environmentfriendly use period of 50 years expires.
3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
1 Chassis
Label l DC power
Label Name Product nameplate label
Description Indicates the product name and certification.
l AC power
Technical Specifications
Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis. Table 1-2 Technical specifications of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight (empty chassis with a backplane) Power consumption Performance 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (H x W x D) 3.5 kg (net weight of a chassis that contains one fan board and two PIU boards) l Maximum power consumption: 240 W l Typical power consumption: 149 W
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2 Boards and Their Appearances
2
About This Chapter
Boards and Their Appearances
This chapter lists the following types of boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports: system control, switching, and timing boards, packet processing boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, auxiliary boards, power supply boards, and fan boards. This chapter also provides the appearances of these boards. 2.1 Board List This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. The equipment provides various functions with different boards inserted. 2.2 Board Appearance This section describes the appearances, dimensions, and bar codes of boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2.1 Board List

This section describes the boards that the equipment supports. The equipment provides various functions with different boards inserted.
Slot Layout
Figure 2-1 shows the slot layout in an OptiX OSN 550 NE. Figure 2-1 Slot layout in an OptiX OSN 550 NE
Slot 91 10 Slot (PIU SLO (PIU) 93 T ) 11 SLO (FAN) (FAN Slot T ) 9 92 (PIU) Slot 7 (System control, switching, and timing boards) SLOT 5 Slot 5 (EXT) (EXT) SLOT 3 Slot 3 (EXT) (EXT) SLOT 1 ) Slot 1 (EXT) (EXT Slot 8 (System control, SLOT 8 (CST/CSH) switching, and timing boards) SLOT 6 Slot 6 (EXT) (EXT) SLOT 4 Slot 4 (EXT) (EXT) SLOT 2 Slot 2 (EXT) ) (EXT
Board List
Table 2-1 lists the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Table 2-1 Boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Board Classificat ion System control, switching, and timing board (Hybrid) Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXL X Board Name The crossconnect, timing, system control, and line board supports: l A packet switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s l A higher order crossconnect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/ s l One 10GE and one STMN ports l System communi cation and control Port Type Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. l One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Board Classificat ion
Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXX
Board Name The crossconnect, timing, system control, and line board supports: l A packet switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s l A higher order crossconnect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/ s l One 10GE port l System communi cation and control
Port Type
Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXL G
Board Name The crossconnect, timing, system control, and line board supports: l A packet switching capacity of 40 Gbit/s l A higher order crossconnect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/ s l One GE and one STM-N ports l System communi cation and control
Port Type
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. l One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXG A
Board Name The crossconnect, timing, system control, and line board supports: l A packet switching capacity of 20 Gbit/s l A higher order crossconnect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/ s l One GE port l System communi cation and control
Port Type
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
10
Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXG B
Board Name The crossconnect, timing, system control, and line board supports: l A packet switching capacity of 40 Gbit/s l A higher order crossconnect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/ s l One GE port l System communi cation and control
Port Type
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
System control, switching, and timing board (TDM)
TNM1 CXL1
The crossconnect, timing, system control, and line board supports: l A higher order crossconnect capacity
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One STM-1 SFP optical/ electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One STM-4 SFP optical port of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type
Slots 7 and 8
TNM1 CXL4
Slots 7 and 8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
11
Board Acron ym TNM1 CXL16
Board Name of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/ s l System communi cation and control 32xsmart E1 service processing board 6xRJ45 FE/ GE processing board
Port Type
l One Ethernet NM port/NM serial port (sharing one RJ45 port) l One STM-16 SFP optical port of the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2 type
Packet processing board
TNM1 MD1
75/120-ohm E1 port
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 EM6T
l Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X) l Two GE electrical ports (they can serve as FE electrical ports): 1000BASE-T l Four FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X) l Two GE/FE SFP optical/ electrical ports: 1000BASE-SX/ 1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/ 1000BASE-ZX/1000Base-T/ 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/ 100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/ 100BASE-ZX l Four GE electrical ports: 1000BASE-T l Four GE/FE SFP optical ports: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/ 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/ 100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/ 100BASE-ZX
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 EM6F
4xRJ45 and 2xSFP FE/ GE processing board
Slots 1 to 6
TNM1 EG4C
4xGE (SFP/ RJ45) processing board
Slots 3 to 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
12
Board Acron ym TNM1 EF8F
Board Name 8xFE processing board 1x10GE processing board
Port Type
Valid Slot Slots 1 to 6
l Eight FE SFP optical ports: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/ 100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/ 100BASE-ZX One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASESW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASEER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN) l Four STM-1 SFP optical/ electrical ports of the S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical type or of SFP electrical modules
TNM1 EX1
Slots 1 and 2
TNM1 CQ1
4-port channelized STM-1 service processing board 2xSTM-1 interface board 4xSTM-1 interface board 2xSTM-4 interface board 42xE1/T1 tributary board 3xE3/T3 tributary board 8xFE switching and processing board
Slots 1 to 6
SDH board
TNH2S L1D
Two STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. Four STM-1 SFP optical/electrical ports. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. Two STM-4 SFP optical ports of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type Forty-two 75/120-ohm E1 ports or forty-two 100-ohm T1 ports Three 75-ohm E3/T3 ports
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S L1Q
Slots 1 to 6
TNH2S L4D PDH board TNH2S P3D TNH2P L3T EoS board TNH2E FS8
Slots 1 to 6
Slots 1 to 6
Slots 1 to 6
Eight FE electrical ports: 10/100BASE-T(X)
Slots 1 to 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
13
Board Acron ym TNH2E GT1
Board Name 1xGE transparent transmission board 2-port optical add/drop multiplexing board
Port Type
Valid Slot Slots 1 to 6
One GE SFP optical/electrical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX/ 1000Base-T l wIN/wOUT l wA1/wA2 l wD1/wD2 l eIN/eOUT l eA1/eA2 l eD1/eD2
WDM board
TNM1 DMD2
slot 1 to 6
Auxiliary interface board
TNM1 AUX
Auxiliary interface board
l One orderwire phone port l One asynchronous data port l One synchronous data port l 6-input/2-output alarm port l One 2-channel external clock port l Two 2-channel external time ports
Slots 1 to 6
Power supply board
UPM
Uninterrupti ble power module
l One 110 V/220 V AC power input port l Two -48 V DC power output ports One -48 V/-60 V DC power input port Two 110 V/220 V AC power input ports
Slot 97
TND1P IU TNF1A PIU
Power supply board Power supply board
Slots 91 and 92 l Slots 4 and 6 (recom mended ) l Slots 2 and 4
Fan board
TNM1 FAN
Fan board
N/A
Slot 93
2.2 Board Appearance

This section describes the appearances, dimensions, and bar codes of boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
14
Appearances and Dimensions

Table 2-2 lists the appearances and dimensions of the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. Table 2-2 Appearances and dimensions of the boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Board Type System control, switching, and timing board Board Name PCX/CXL Appearance For example, PCXLX: Dimensions (H x W x D) 22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm
Packet processing board
MD1/ EM6T/ EM6F/ EG4C/ EF8F/ EX1/CQ1 SL1D/ SL4D/ SL1Q
For example, EM6F:
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
SDH board
For example, SL1D:
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
PDH board
SP3D/ PL3T
For example, SP3D:
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
EoS board
EFS8/ EGT1
For example, EFS8:
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
WDM board
DMD2
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
15
Board Type Auxiliary board
Board Name AUX
Appearance
Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
Power supply board
UPM
44.0 mm x 438.0 mm x 240.0 mm
0 48 GIE
5S
PIU
41.4 mm x 21.0 mm x 229.9 mm
APIU
40.1 mm x 193.8 mm x 208.7 mm
Fan board
FAN
86.2 mm x 28.5 mm x 217.6 mm
Note: The figure in the right cell shows the three dimensions. "H" and "W" indicate the height and width of the front panel respectively and "D" indicates the depth of the printed circuit board (PCB).
H D W
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
16
Bar Code
The front panel of a board has two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers help you remove or insert a board. The captive screws fasten a board to the chassis. A board bar code (as shown in Figure 2-2) is attached to one of the ejector levers. Figure 2-2 Bar code
Bar code
020XES10AA800077-TNM1MD1 A
4 5
1 2 3 4 5
Last six digits of the part number Internal code Board version Board name Feature code
NOTE
Only the bar codes of some boards contain feature codes, which further classify boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
17
3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards
System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 550 uses the system control, switching, and timing board PCX. 3.1 PCX The PCX is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in Hybrid mode. It is available in five types of finished boards. 3.2 CXL The CXL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in TDM mode.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
18
3.1 PCX
The PCX is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in Hybrid mode. It is available in five types of finished boards.
3.1.1 Version Description

The functional version of the PCX is TNM1. PCX boards are available in five types of finished boards: PCXLX, PCXX, PCXLG, PCXGA, and PCXGB. Table 3-1 lists the differences between the five types of PCX finished boards. Table 3-1 Differences between the five types of PCX finished boards Fini she d Boa rd PCX LX Packet Switching Capability TDM CrossConnect Capability A higher order crossconnect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order crossconnect capacity of 5 Gbit/s TDM Service Port Packet Service Port
60 Gbit/s
One STM-1/STM-4/ STM-16 small formfactor pluggable (SFP) optical/ electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. None
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASEZW (WAN)
PCX X
60 Gbit/s
One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASEZW (WAN)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
19
Fini she d Boa rd PCX LG
Packet Switching Capability
TDM CrossConnect Capability
TDM Service Port
Packet Service Port
40 Gbit/s
One STM-1/STM-4/ STM-16 small formfactor pluggable (SFP) optical/ electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. None
One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/ 1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/ 1000BASE-ZX
PCX GA
20 Gbit/s
One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/ 1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/ 1000BASE-ZX One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/ 1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/ 1000BASE-ZX
PCX GB
40 Gbit/s
None
3.1.2 Functions and Features

This section describes the functions and features that the PCX supports.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Unit

Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of the PCX supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
20
Table 3-2 Functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of the PCX supports Function and Feature Basic function s Packet switching capability Board l The PCXLX/PCXX supports 60 Gbit/s packet switching function. l The PCXLG/PCXGB supports 40 Gbit/s packet switching function. l The PCXGA supports 20 Gbit/s packet switching function. Time division multiplexing (TDM) crossconnect capacity System control and communication l A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
l Manages and controls the running status of an NE. l Works as a communication service unit between the network management system (NMS) and NEs to help the NMS to control and manage the NE. See Table 3-4. The packet switching unit of the PCX works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS functions. l Setup mode: static tunnels l Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) l Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM): supports MPLS tunnel OAM and multiprotocol label switching transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM. MPLS tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLS-TP tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Packet system performance Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) functions
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
21
Function and Feature Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) functions
Board The packet switching unit of the PCX works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement PWE3 functions. l Service categories TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services [CESs]) Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services ETH PWE3 services l Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs) l Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and multi-segment PWs (MS-PWs). l PW encapsulation mode: raw mode or tagged mode l PW control word: supported by the PCXLG/PCXGA/ PCXGB board whose printed circuit board (PCB) version is Ver.B and the PCXLX/PCXX board. l Protection: 1:1 PW APS l OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW OAM. MPLS PW OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and MPLSTP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Equipment-level protection Synchro nization Clock/Time source
l 1+1 hot standby The traced clock source at the physical layer can be any of the following: l External clock l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) line clock l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) tributary clock l Synchronous Ethernet clock l Internal clock source The traced packet clock/time source can be any of the following: l External time l IEEE 1588v2 clock and time l IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock
Clock protocol
l Standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol l Extended SSM protocol l Best master clock (BMC) protocol
Data commun ication network (DCN)
Outband DCN
l Mode 1: 32 data communications channels (DCCs) that are composed of D1-D3 bytes l Mode 2: 12 DCCs that are composed of D1-D3 bytes or six DCCs that are composed of D4-D12 bytes
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
22
Function and Feature Inband DCN Network manage ment protocol Huawei Embedded Control Channel (HWECC) protocol IP Open systems interconnectio n (OSI) over DCC protocol Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Auxiliary and management ports
Board l Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth is configurable. Supported by outband and inband DCNs
Supported by outband and inband DCNs Supported only by outband DCNs
Supported
Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet NMS port or NMS serial port.
Line Unit
Table 3-2 lists the functions and features that the line unit of the PCX supports. Table 3-3 Functions and features that the line unit of the PCX supports Function and Feature Basic functions Board l PCXLX: receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals and 1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals. l PCXX: receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals. l PCXLG: receives/transmits and processes 1xGE signals and 1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals. l PCXGA/PCXGB: receives/transmits and processes 1xGE signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
23
Function and Feature Port specifica tions TDM service port
Board l PCXLX/PCXLG: One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small formfactor pluggable (SFP) optical/electrical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules. l PCXX/PCXGB/PCXGA: none l An optical port can be a colored coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) optical port or a colored dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. A colored DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 120 km. l The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules are supported: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module STM-1/STM-4 single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module STM-1 pluggable electrical module
NOTE Only an STM-16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical port.
Packet service port
l PCXLX/PCXX: One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASESR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASEEW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN) l PCXLG/PCXGB/PCXGA: One GE SFP optical port: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/ 1000BASE-ZX l A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port or a colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 70 km. A colored DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. l The following types of SFP modules are supported: GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module l The XFP module supported is a 10GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
24
Function and Feature Port attribute s Working mode
Board l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and autonegotiation. l The 10GE optical port supports 10G full-duplex and the setting of LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes Traffic control at ports Port type query Query and setting of optical power thresholds Packet services E-Line services
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. l Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supported Supported
l Native ETH services: E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent transmission E-Line services based on virtual local area networks (VLANs) E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
E-LAN services
l Native ETH services: E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs (virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
Ethernet data frame format Jumbo frame MTU SDH service functions (for PCXLX/PCXLG boards) Packet protectio n schemes Tunnel APS PW APS
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being the default value. Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services, VC-4-4c services (supported by STM-4/STM-16 service ports), and VC-4-16c services (supported by STM-16 service ports). Supports 1:1 tunnel APS. Supports 1:1 PW APS.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
25
Function and Feature MSTP
Board Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344. l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
ERPS LAG
LPT TDM protectio n schemes (for PCXLX/ PCXLG boards) Sub-network connection protection (SNCP) Ring multiplex section protection (MSP) Linear MSP
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT. Supports SNCP at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels.
Supports ring MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.
Supports linear MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
26
Function and Feature Quality of service (QoS) functions
Board The packet switching unit of the PCX works with its service interface unit or a service board to implement QoS functions. l DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets. l Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + SVLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies. l QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies. l Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy. l CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and VUNI ingresses. l Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. l Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping. l Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Mainten ance features
MPLS/MPLSTP OAM
l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported. l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711. l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement (LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST) (only packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication, and two-way delay measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
27
Function and Feature ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM:
Board Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag. Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with reference to ITU-T Y.7131. l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Warm reset and cold reset Board power consumption query Board temperature detection Board voltage detection Port mirroring l Supports local port mirroring. l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction of a UNI port. Synchro nization SDH clock source Synchronous Ethernet IEEE 1588v2 IEEE 1588 ACR Transmits SDH line clock signals at one port. Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one port. Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one port. Transmits 1588 ACR clock signals at one port.
NOTE Ports working in 10GE WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588v2 or IEEE 1588 ACR.
DCN
l Each TDM port supports one embedded control channel (ECC). l Each GE/10GE port supports one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping
Supported
Packet System Performance Specifications

Table 3-4 lists the packet system performance specifications of the OptiX OSN equipment.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
28
Table 3-4 Packet system performance specifications It e m Pr ot ec tio n Specifications
MPLS/ MPLS-TP tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) MPLS/ MPLS-TP PW APS
64
NOTE MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share resources.
Numbe r of MPLS/ MPLSTP PW APS protecti on groups Numbe r of bound membe rs
64
NOTE MPLS tunnel APS, MPLS PW APS, MPLS-TP tunnel APS, and MPLS-TP PW APS share resources.
512
Link-state pass through (LPT) Link aggregatio n group (LAG)
16
Numbe r of LAGs Numbe r of membe rs in a LAG Numbe r of instanc es support ed by a port
16
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
29
It e m
Specifications
Numbe r of port groups Numbe r of ports provide d by port groups Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) on the packet plane M ai nt en an ce MPLS/ MPLS-TP tunnel OAM MPLS/ MPLS-TP PW OAM ETH OAM (MPLS/ MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS/ MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.) 8
16
128
NOTE MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
128
NOTE MPLS tunnel OAM, MPLS PW OAM, MPLS-TP tunnel OAM, MPLS-TP PW OAM, and ETH OAM share resources.
Numbe r of mainten ance domain s (MDs) Numbe r of mainten ance associat ions (MAs)
64
64
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
30
It e m
Specifications
Numbe r of mainten ance associat ion end points (MEPs) Numbe r of mainten ance associat ion interme diate points (MIPs) ATM OAM Se rv ic es E-Line services E-LAN services 8K 1K
64
64
NOTE Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPWSs) share resources.
Numbe r of ELAN services (ELAN VSIs) support ed by an NE (VSI is short for virtual switch instanc e.)
l Native ETH services: 1 l PWE3 ETH services (VPLSs): 128

NOTE Native ETH services and PWE3 ETH services (VPLSs) cannot coexist on the same NE.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
31
It e m
Specifications
Numbe r of logical ports support ed by a VSI (Native ETH) Numbe r of logical ports support ed by a VSI (VPLS) Numbe r of virtual usernetwor k interfac es (VUNIs) support ed by an NE (VPLS) Numbe r of split horizon groups support ed by a VSI Numbe r of logical ports support ed by an NE
1K
128
Number of V-UNIs 32 64 128 256 512 1024
Number of VLANs 4096 2047 1023 511 255 127
1K
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
32
It e m
Specifications
CES services ATM services
256 Numbe r of local services Numbe r of remote services 128
256
M ult iLi nk Po int to Po int Pr ot oc ol ( M LP P P) IG M P sn oo pi ng
Number of ML-PPP groups supported by an NE Number of PPP links supported by an NE Number of member links supported in an MLPPP group
64
504
16
Number of multicast groups Number of members in a multicast group
512
1K
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
33
It e m Q oS
Specifications
Number of port weighted random early discard (WRED) policies Number of virtual usernetwork interface (V-UNI) ingress policies Number of port policies Number of Differentia ted Services (DiffServ) domains Number of port flows Number of V-UNI ingress flows Number of traffic classificati on rules Number of access control lists (ACLs)
256
256
512 512
512
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
34
It e m Ot he rs
Specifications
Number of MPLS tunnels
l Unidirectional: 1K l Bidirectional: 512

NOTE l One bidirectional MPLS tunnel is counted as two unidirectional MPLS tunnels. l If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
Tunnel bandwidth Number of static PWs
10 Gbit/s 1K
NOTE If MPLS tunnels do not carry PWs, the sum of PWs and MPLS tunnels must not exceed 1K. If MPLS tunnels carry PWs, the MPLS tunnels are not counted and the number of carried PWs must not exceed 1K. Therefore, if each MPLS tunnel carries one PW, the number of MPLS tunnels and the number of PWs can both be 1K.
PW bandwidth Number of MS-PWs Number of QinQ links MAC addresses
10 Gbit/s 128 1K Numbe r of static MAC address es support ed by an E-LAN Numbe r of MAC address es support ed by ELAN services 512
16K
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
35
It e m
Specifications
Numbe r of MAC address es support ed by an NE VLAN ID range supported by a port 1 to 4094
16K
NOTE
The values listed in the preceding table are the maximum values supported by the OSN equipment.
3.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The PCX consists of a system control and communication unit, a packet switching unit, a GE/ 10GE signal access unit, a cross-connect unit, a line unit, a clock unit, and a power supply unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
36
Function Block Diagram

Figure 3-1 Function block diagram of the PCX
Backplane
STM-1/4/16 signal
Line unit
Crossconnect unit
TDM service
Service board
GE/10GE signal
GE/10GE signal processing unit
GE/10GE signal
Packet switching unit
Packet service
Service board
Control bus
Ethernet NM port NM serial port
System control and communication unit
Clock signal received from other boards Clock unit Clock signal provided to other boards
Clock signal received from the service unit on the board
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board -48 V/-60 V
Power supplied to the other units on the board
Power supply unit
Fuse
System power supply System power supply +3.3 V power supplied to other boards +12 V power supplied to fans
-48 V/-60 V
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus: Manages other boards and the other units on the PCX, and collects alarms and performance events. Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card. l l l l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines l The system control and communication unit on a PCX board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the standby PCX board by carrying FE signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and standby PCX boards form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for packet services. l After receiving services from a packet service board, the packet switching unit grooms the services based on the configurations delivered by the system control and communication unit. After receiving protocol packets from a packet service board, the packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits the protocol packets to the packet service board.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms TDM services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-2 shows the function block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-2 Function block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM service unit
Higher order crossconnect module HOXC
Sink TDM service unit
Lower order crossconnect module LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over cross-connect buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order crossconnect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the PCX and other boards. The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages and IEEE 1588 ACR messages from the GE/10GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time synchronization. The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock. The clock units on the active and standby PCX boards transmit clock signals to each other.
l l
GE/10GE Signal Processing Unit

The GE/10GE signal processing unit receives/transmits and processes 1xGE/10GE optical signals. l In the receive direction: After performing optical-to-electrical (O/E) conversion, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE/10GE optical signals, the GE/10GE signal processing unit extracts framed GE/10GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The GE/10GE signal processing unit also performs cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs). The GE/10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames, process labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets, perform quality of service (QoS) processing such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames, and process operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) packets and protocol packets. l In the transmit direction: The GE/10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames, process labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets, perform QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames, and process OAM packets and protocol packets. After delimiting frames, adding preambles, and calculating CRC codes, the GE/10GE signal processing unit performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then transmits GE/10GE signals to the GE/10GE optical port after performing electrical-tooptical (E/O) conversion.
Line Unit
The line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving, serial/ parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: l l Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board. Combines two -48 V/-60 V power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the +3.3 V power supply required by other boards.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 39
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the +12 V power supply required by fans.
3.1.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Table 3-5 shows the front panel of each PCX finished board. Table 3-5 Front panel of each PCX finished board Finish ed Board PCXL X PCXX Front Panel Diagram
PCX
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT LOS
L/A
RST
TX/RX
TX / RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
PCX
STAT PROG SYNC SRV ACT
L/A
RST
TX / RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
L/A
PCXL Ga PCXG A PCXG B
PCX
STM T/R
GE T/R
RST
NMS 1/COM
EXT
PCX
L/A
RST
TX/RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
PCX
L/A
RST
TX/RX
NMS 1/COM
EXT
a: There are two types of front panels for the PCXLG, which differ only in silkscreen information. The front panel described in this section is of a later version.
Indicators
The front panel of the PCX has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT, LOS, and L/A. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
40
Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports

Table 3-6 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports Port NMS/ COM Descript ion Ethernet NM port/ NM serial port Connector Type Pin Assignment l Pin 1: transmitting data (+) RJ45 l Pin 2: transmitting data (-) l Pin 3: receiving data (+)
87 65 4 32 1
Required Cable 16.10 Network Cable
l Pin 4: grounding end of the NM serial port l Pin 5: receive end of the NM serial port l Pin 6: receiving data (-) l Pin 7: not defined l Pin 8: transmit end of the NM serial port -
For status explanation for the indicators of an RJ45 port, see Table 3-5.
EXT
Reserved
Table 3-7 Status explanation for indicators on an Ethernet port Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Off Meaning The Ethernet link is working properly. The Ethernet link is interrupted. The port is receiving or transmitting data. The port is not receiving or transmitting data.
Service Ports
Table 3-8 Description of the service ports on the PCX Boar d PCX LX/ PCX X Port TX/ RX Descr iption 10GE optical port Connector Type Pin Assignment l TX represents the transmit port. Required Cable SFP optical port: 16.1 Fiber Jumper
l 10GE optical port: LC XFP optical module
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
41
Boar d PCX LG PCX GA/ PCX GB PCX LX PCX LG
Port GE T/ R TX/ RX
Descr iption GE optical port
Connector Type
Pin Assignment l RX represents the receive port.
Required Cable SFP electrical port: 16.6 STM-1 Cable
l GE/STM-1/4/16 optical port: LC SFP optical module

TX RX
TX/ RX STM T/R
STM1/4/16 optical / electri cal port
l STM-1 electrical port: SFP electrical module

TX RX
Buttons
Table 3-9 Buttons Button RST Name Warm reset button Description After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
3.1.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the PCX board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the PCX board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the PCX board and the CF card. If the active system control, switching, and timing board and the CF card have different software packages, the associated NE reports an SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm if it restarts after a power failure.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
42
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
1 2
ON DIP
3
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
3. Daughter board
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings

Setting of DIP Switchesa 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled. The value is reserved. Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running. Meaning
0 0
0 0
0 1
1 0
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
43
Setting of DIP Switchesa 4 0 3 1 2 0 1 1
Meaning
Indicates the BIOS holdover state. Indicates the BIOS exhibition state. The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Restores the data of the CF card. Erases data in the system parameter area. Erases databases. Erases NE software, including patches. Erases databases and NE software (including patches). Erases all data in the file system.
1 1
0 1
1 0
1 0
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
44
Meaning
Erases all the data except for the board manufacturing information and basic BIOS data. That is, all data in the file system, extended BIOS area, and system parameter area is erased.
NOTE a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.1.6 Valid Slots

The PCX can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis. Figure 3-3 shows the mapping between physical slots and their logical slots. Physical slot 7 has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 7, slot 9, slot 81, slot 83, and slot 85; physical slot 8 has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 8, slot 10, slot 82, slot 84, and slot 86. Figure 3-3 Logical slots for a PCX board
Slot Slot 7 91 10 Slot (PIU SLO (PIU) 93 T ) 11 SLO (FAN Slot (FAN) T ) 9 92 (PIU) Slot 9 Slot 81 SLOT 7 Slot 83 Slot 85 Slot 8 Slot 10 Slot 82 Slot 84 SLOT 8 (CST/CSH) (SCC) (STG) (SCC) (CST/CSH) SLOT 6 SLOT 5 Slot 6 (EXT) Slot 5 (EXT) (EXT) (EXT) SLOT 3 SLOT 4 Slot 3 (EXT) Slot 4 (EXT) (EXT) (EXT) SLOT 1 SLOT 2 ) Slot 1 (EXT) Slot 2 (EXT) ) (EXT (EXT Slot 86 (STG)
The board that can be created in a logical slot varies according to the manufactured board that is installed in a physical slot. Table 3-10 provides the mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards. Table 3-10 Mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards Manufact ured Board PCXLX Logical Slot 7/8 SL16S/ SL4S/SL1S Logical Slot 9/10 PEX1 Logical Slot 81/82 SCC Logical Slot 83/84 PUXC Logical Slot 85/86 STG
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
45
Manufact ured Board PCXX PCXLG PCXGB PCXGA
Logical Slot 7/8 SL16S/ SL4S/SL1S -
Logical Slot 9/10 PEX1 PEG1 PEG1 PEG1
Logical Slot 81/82 SCC SCC SCC SCC
Logical Slot 83/84 PUXC PEXC PEXC PGXC
Logical Slot 85/86 STG STG STG STG
3.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. PCX boards have feature codes. Table 3-11 Feature codes of the PCX Feature Code TNM1PCXLG1604 TNM1PCXLG404 TNM1PCXLX1604 TNM1PCXLX404 TNM1PCXLG406 TNM1PCXLG405 TNM1PCXLX406 TNM1PCXLX405 TNM1PCXLG1603 TNM1PCXLG1602 TNM1PCXLG1601 TNM1PCXLG402 TNM1PCXLG401 TNM1PCXLX1603 TNM1PCXLX1602 Port Type 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.2, LC) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.2, LC) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single Fibre Bidirectional, TX 1490nm) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single Fibre Bidirectional, TX 1310nm) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single Fibre Bidirectional, TX 1490nm) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC, Single Fibre Bidirectional, TX 1310nm) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.1, LC) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, S-16.1, LC) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC) 1xGE (SFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.2, LC) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.1, LC)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
46
Feature Code TNM1PCXLX1601 TNM1PCXLX402 TNM1PCXLX401
Port Type 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, S-16.1, LC) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, L-4.1, LC) 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC)
3.1.8 Technical Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 3-12 lists the technical specifications of the PCX. Table 3-12 Technical specifications of the PCX Item Auxiliar y ports and manage ment ports Service ports NMS/ COM EXT Ethernet NM port/NM serial port Reserved Performance Not involved Not involved
TX/RX (PCXL X/ PCXX) TX/RX (PCXL G/ PCXGA / PCXGB ) TX/RX (PCXL X/ PCXLG )
10GE optical port
See Table 3-13, Table 3-24, and Table 3-25.
GE optical port
See Table 3-14, Table 3-15, Table 3-23, and Table 3-16.
STM-1/4/16 optical/ electrical port
See Table 3-18, Table 3-19, Table 3-20, Table 3-21, Table 3-26, Table 3-27, Table 3-17, and Table 3-22.
Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight
22.36 mm x 193.80 mm x 269.73 mm 0.80 kg
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
47
Item Power consumption l PCXLX: 45 W l PCXX: 44.5 W l PCXLG: 37 W l PCXGA/PCXGB: 36.5 W
Performance
Table 3-13 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports Item Optical port type Value 10GBASE-SR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-SW (WAN) Multi-mode LC 0.3 840 to 860 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-LW (WAN) Single-mode LC 10 1260 to 1330 10GBASE-ER (LAN)/ 10GBASE-EW (WAN) Single-mode LC 40 1530 to 1565 10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-ZW (WAN) Single-mode LC 80 1530 to 1565
Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-1.3 to -7.3
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
-7.5
-11
-15
-24
-1
0.5
-1
-7
8.2
Table 3-14 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Optical port type Value 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX 1000BASE-ZX
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
48
Item Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value Multi-mode LC 0.5 770 to 860 Single-mode LC 10 1270 to 1355 Single-mode LC 40 1270 to 1355 Single-mode LC 80 1500 to 1580
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
-17
-20
-23
-23
-3
-3
-3
Table 3-15 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Paramete r Type of optical interface Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Value 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
10
40
Single-mode LC 1490 1310
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
49
Paramete r Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1310 1490 1310 1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
Table 3-16 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00 309405.00 64970.00
9.00 11.80 17.30 25.00 29.20 31.30 33.40 37.40 98.00
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
50
Table 3-17 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports Item Bit rate Code pattern Connector Signal bit rate at the output port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance Value 155520 kbit/s CMI SAA straight female Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Table 3-18 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 155520 kbit/s S-1.1 15 1261 to 1360 Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 40 1263 to 1360 Single-mode LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 80 1480 to 1580 Single-mode LC -5 to 0 -34 -10 10
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
51
Item
Value
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-1.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1" represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 3-19 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Parameter Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Type of optical interface Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelength (nm) Operating receive wavelength (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 155520 kbit/s NRZ S-1.1 15 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 1310 1550 L-1.1 40 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -5 to 0 -32 -10 10 1310 1550
Table 3-20 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Value 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
52
Item Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 15 1274 to 1356 40 1280 to 1335 80 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2
Single-mode LC -3 to +2 -28 -8 10
Table 3-21 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Paramete r Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Type of optical interface Transmiss ion distance (km) Value 622080 kbit/s NRZ S-4.1 L-4.1
15
40
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
53
Paramete r Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value Single-mode LC 1490 1310 Single-mode LC 1490 1310
1310
1490
1310
1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
Table 3-22 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Value 2488320 kbit/s S-16.1 15 1260 to 1360 L-16.1 40 1280 to 1335 L-16.2 80 1500 to 1580
Single-mode LC -5 to 0
Single-mode LC -2 to +3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
54
Item Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value -18 0 8.2 -27 -9 8.2 -28 -9 8.2
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 3-23 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) 1,250,000 kbit/s Single-mode LC 40 0 to 5 80 0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 -19
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
Minimum -3 overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2
-9 8.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
55
Table 3-24 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Single-mode LC 70 0 to 4 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23 l 1571 nm: -22 l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21 Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -9 8.2
Table 3-25 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM) Parameter Value DWDM Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Central frequency (THz) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Single-mode LC 40 -1 to +2 80 -1 to +3
192.1 to 196.0 10 -17
192.1 to 196.0 10 -24
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
56
Parameter
Value DWDM
Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
-1 9.5
-9 8.2
Table 3-26 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) 155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16) Single-mode LC 40 0 to 5 80 0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 -19
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9 8.2
Table 3-27 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM) Parameter Value DWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
2,488,320 kbit/s Single-mode LC
57
Parameter
Value DWDM
Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Central frequency (THz) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
120 -1 to +3 192.1 to 196.0 10 -28 -9 8.2
3.2 CXL
The CXL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board that works in TDM mode.

The functional version of CXL boards is TNM1. Depending on the rates of line units, CXL boards are available in three types: TNM1CXL1, TNM1CXL4, and TNM1CXL16. Table 3-28 describes the versions of the CXL. Table 3-28 Versions of the CXL Board Type TNM1CXL1 Available Port 1xSTM-1 optical/electrical port Type of Optical Port Optical port: S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 Electrical port: SFP electrical port TNM1CXL4 TNM1CXL16 1xSTM-4 optical port 1xSTM-16 optical port S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
58

The CXL has a system control and communication unit, a cross-connect unit, a clock unit, and an STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 line unit. Table 3-29 lists the functions and features that the CXL supports. Table 3-29 Functions and features that the CXL supports Function and Feature Cross-connection functions Board l Provides a higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s. l Supports cross-connections at the VC-4, VC-3, VC-12, VC-4-4c, and VC-4-16c levels, and achieves service grooming between lines, between tributaries, and between lines and tributaries. Line functions l Provides one STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical port. STM-1 optical ports support SFP electrical modules. l The STM-1/STM-4 optical port supports single-fiber bidirectional optical modules. l Provides the clock unit with one synchronous timing source. l Processes section overheads and higher order path overheads. l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through. l Provides transparent DCCs. l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes. l Processes AU pointers. l Supports maintenance features such as inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths, setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received, and pass-through tests and checks of K bytes.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
59
Function and Feature Optical module specifications
Board l The STM-16 optical port can be of the S-16.1, L-16.1, or L-16.2 type. l The STM-4 optical port can be of the S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 type. l The STM-1 optical port can be of the S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 type. l An optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port or a colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. A colored DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 120 km. l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G. 957. l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance. l Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and supports the ALS function. l Optical module information can be detected and queried.
NOTE Only an STM-16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical port.
Clock functions
l Supports the non-standard SSM protocol, standard SSM protocol, and extended SSM protocol. l Provides synchronous clock signals for boards in the system. l Supports the following working modes: trace mode, holdover mode, and free-run mode. l Controls clock source priorities. l Controls the clock source switching function. l Processes and sets the S1 byte.
System control functions
l Exchanges information with other boards, provides the data configuration function, and collects performance data and alarm data. l Provides a standard Ethernet NM port/RS-232 data terminal equipment (DTE) port so that the NMS can manage the equipment.
Alarms and performance events
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
60
Function and Feature Protection schemes
Board l Supports the following equipment-level protection scheme: 1+1 backup l Supports the following network-level protection schemes: Two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP CXL4/CXL16: Two-fiber bidirectional ring MSP Linear MSP SNCP
Maintenance features
l Inloops and outloops at optical ports l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) l Board manufacturing information query l In-service FPGA loading l Smooth upgrade of the board software

The CXL consists of a system control and communication unit, a cross-connect unit, a line unit, a clock unit, and a power supply unit. Figure 3-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
61
Figure 3-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL

Backplane
STM-1/4/16 Line unit Crossconnect unit TDM service Service board
Control bus FE signal Ethernet NM port NM serial port System control and communication unit System control and communication unit of the standby CXL board Clock signal required by other boards Clock unit of the standby CXL board
Clock unit
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Power supplied to the other units on the board Power supply unit Fuse -48 V/-60 V System power supply System power supply +12 V power supplied to fans +3.3 V power supplied to other boards
-48 V/-60 V
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit. The system control and communication unit performs the following functions: l The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus: Manages other boards and the other units on the CXL, and collects alarms and performance events. Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card. l l l l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control unit. The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and enables FPGA loading. The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit, the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes: Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services Exchanging orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines l The system control and communication unit on a CXL board communicates with the system control and communication unit on the standby CXL board by carrying FE signals over the
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and standby CXL boards form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order crossconnect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 3-5 shows the functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit. Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM service unit
Higher order crossconnect module HOXC
Sink TDM service unit
Lower order crossconnect module LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the CXL and other boards. The clock units on the active and standby CXL boards transmit clock signals to each other.
Line Unit
The line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving, serial/ parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
l l l
Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board. Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the +3.3 V power supply required by other boards. Combines and then converts -48 V/-60 V DC power inputs into the +12 V power supply required by the fan.
3.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 3-6 Front panel of the CXL
CXL
RST
TX/RX
NMS1/COM
EXT
Indicators
The front panel of the CXL has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT, and LOS. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
64
Management Ports
Table 3-30 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports Port NMS1/ COM Description Ethernet NM port/ NM serial port Connector Type RJ45 Pin Assignment l Pin 1: for the network port to transmit data (+)
87654321
l Pin 2: for the network port to transmit data (-) l Pin 3: for the network port to receive data (+) l Pin 4: signal ground l Pin 5: receive end of the NM serial port l Pin 6: for the network port to receive data (-) l Pin 7: not defined l Pin 8: transmit end of the NM serial port
EXT
Reserved
NOTE
When an NE is configured with two CXL boards, only port COM on the working CXL board is available.
Table 3-31 Status explanation for indicators on an Ethernet port Indicator LINK (green) State On Off ACT (yellow) On or blinking Meaning The Ethernet link is working properly. The Ethernet link is interrupted. The port is receiving or transmitting data.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
65
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The port is not receiving or transmitting data.
Service Ports
Table 3-32 Description of the service ports on the CXL Port TX/RX Description Transmits and receives STM-1/ STM-4/STM-16 optical/electrical signals. Connector Type STM-1/4/16 optical port: LC SFP optical module
TX
Pin Assignment l TX represents the transmit port. l RX represents the receive RX port.
Required Cable SFP optical port: 16.1 Fiber Jumper SFP electrical port: 16.6 STM-1 Cable
STM-1 electrical port: SFP electrical module

TX RX
Buttons
Table 3-33 Buttons Button RST Name Warm reset button Description After this button is pressed, a warm reset is performed on the board.
3.2.5 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
NE databases, system parameters (including NE-IP, NE-ID, and subnet mask), software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE databases, system parameters, and NE logs on the CXL board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
66
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the CXL board during package diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize software packages on the CXL board and the CF card.
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
2
ON DIP
1. DIP switches
2. CF card
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings

Setting of DIP Switchesa 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 Indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled. The value is reserved. Indicates that a memory selfcheck is running. Meaning
0 0
0 0
0 1
1 0
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
1 2 3
67
Meaning
Indicates that the board is being debugged. Indicates that the board works with the watchdog disabled and a full memory check is running. Indicates the BIOS holdover state. Indicates the BIOS exhibition state. The value is reserved. (By default, this value indicates that the board works with the watchdog enabled.) Indicates that the equipment is being tested and the NE software is started directly without a self-check. Restores the data of the CF card. Erases data in the system parameter area. Erases databases.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
68
Meaning
Erases NE software, including patches. Erases databases and NE software (including patches). Erases all data in the file system. Formats the flash file system, and erases data in the system parameter area and extended BIOS, with basic BIOS reserved.
1 1
1 1
1 1
0 1
NOTE a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
3.2.6 Valid Slots

The CXL can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
3.2.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. CXL boards have feature codes. Table 3-34 Feature code of the CXL Feature Code 01 02 03 04
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Type of Optical Port S-1.1 L-1.1 S-4.1 L-4.1
69
Feature Code 05 06 07 08
Type of Optical Port S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.) S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm.) L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.) L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm.) S-4.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1490 nm.) S-4.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1490 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm.)
09
10
11
12
13

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for optical ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 3-35 lists the technical specifications of the CXL. Table 3-35 Technical specifications of the CXL Item Auxiliar y and manage ment ports Service ports NMS1/ COM EXT TX/RX Network management system (NMS) port or NMS serial port Reserved STM-1/4/16 optical/ electrical ports Performance Not involved
Not involved Table 3-37, Table 3-38, Table 3-39, Table 3-40, Table 3-41, Table 3-36, Table 3-42, Table 3-43
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
70
Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption
Performance 22.36 mm x 183.80 mm x 197.70 mm 0.50 kg 21 W
Table 3-37 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-1 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Value 155520 kbit/s S-1.1 15 1261 to 1360 Single-mode LC -15 to -8 L-1.1 40 1263 to 1360 Single-mode LC -5 to 0 L-1.2 80 1480 to 1580 Single-mode LC -5 to 0
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
71
Value -28 -8 8.2 -34 -10 10 -34 -10 10
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
72
Table 3-39 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 15 1274 to 1356 L-4.1 40 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 80 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2
Table 3-40 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Paramete r Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Type of optical interface Value 622080 kbit/s NRZ S-4.1 L-4.1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
73
Paramete r Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 15 40
1310
1490
1310
1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
Table 3-41 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-16 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Value 2488320 kbit/s S-16.1 15 1260 to 1360 L-16.1 40 1280 to 1335 L-16.2 80 1500 to 1580
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
74
Item Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value Single-mode LC -5 to 0 -18 0 8.2 Single-mode LC -2 to +3 -27 -9 8.2 Single-mode LC -2 to +3 -28 -9 8.2
NOTE Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm). Explanation for optical port type "L-16.2" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first two digits "16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "2" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1550 nm).
Table 3-42 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) 155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s (STM-16) Single-mode LC 40 0 to 5 80 0 to 5
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 -19
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
Minimum -3 overload (dBm)
-9
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
75
Parameter
Value CWDM
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
Table 3-43 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM) Parameter Value DWDM Nominal bit rate Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Central frequency (THz) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 2,488,320 kbit/s Single-mode LC 120 -1 to +3 192.1 to 196.0 10 -28 -9 8.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
76
4 Packet Processing Boards
4
About This Chapter
Packet Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following packet processing boards: EF8F, EG4C, EM6T, EM6F, CQ1, and MD1. 4.1 EF8F The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board. 4.2 EM6T/EM6F The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE processing board. 4.3 EG4C The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board. 4.4 EX1 The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board. 4.5 MD1 The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board. 4.6 CQ1 CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
77
4.1 EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.

The functional version of the EF8F is TNM1.

The EF8F receives/transmits, processes, and converges 8xFE signals. Table 4-1 lists the functions and features that the EF8F supports. The EF8F needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 4-1 Functions and features that the EF8F supports Function and Feature Basic functions Board Receives/Transmits fast Ethernet (FE) service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE service signals. 1.25 Gbit/s l FE optical port: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASELX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX l The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP) modules are supported: FE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module FE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module Port attributes Working mode TAG attributes l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of a port. Traffic control at ports Port type query Query and setting of optical power thresholds Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supported Supported
Backplane bus bandwidth Port specifications
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
78
Function and Feature Packet services Ethernet line (E-Line) services l Native ETH services:
Board E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent transmission E-Line services based on virtual local area networks (VLANs) E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services
Ethernet data frame format Jumbo frame Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Protection schemes Tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) Pseudo wire (PW) APS Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Link aggregation group (LAG)
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being the default value. Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.
Supports 1:1 PW APS. Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
79
Function and Feature Link-state pass through (LPT) Quality of service (QoS)
Board Point-point and point-multipoint LPT l DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets. l Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies. l QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies. l Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy. l CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI ingresses. l Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. l Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping. l Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Maintenan ce features
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)/ Multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLSTP) operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
80
Function and Feature Ethernet OAM (ETH OAM)
Board l Ethernet service OAM: Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag. Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with reference to ITU-T Y.7131. l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of Ethernet ports Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) Board power consumption query Board voltage detection Board temperature detection SFP module information query Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON]) Hot board swapping Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules Port mirroring l Supports local port mirroring. l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction of a UNI port. Synchroni zation Synchronous Ethernet IEEE 1588v2 IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) Data communication network (DCN) Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at eight ports. Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at eight ports. Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at eight ports.
Each FE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supported
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
81

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EF8F.

Figure 4-1 EF8F board function block diagram
Backplane
FE signal access unit
Control signal FE signal
Service processing unit
Ethernet signal
Dual-fed and selectivereceiving unit
Ethernet signal Packet switching unit
Control bus of the board
Logic control unit
System control bus
+3.3 V power supplied to the board
Power supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
System power supply System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Clock unit
System clock signal
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction

Table 4-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EF8F Step 1 Function Unit FE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, and CRC checks for frame signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
82
Step 2
Function Unit Service processing unit
Processing Flow Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.
Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and standby packet switching units.
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction

Table 4-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EF8F Step 1 Function Unit Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit Processing Flow l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets. 3 FE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and CRC code computing. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE signals through Ethernet ports.
Control Signal Processing

The service processing unit controls the FE signal access unit using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the service processing unit and the dual-fed and selectivereceiving unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses, alarms, and performance events reported by units on the board to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions: Receives two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies from the backplane, converts the supplied power into +3.3 V power by using the DC-DC unit, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the other units on the board.
Clock Unit
l l The clock unit receives the system clock from the control bus on the backplane, and supplies clock signals to other units on the EF8F. The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages and IEEE 1588 ACR messages from the FE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time synchronization. The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock.
4.1.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-2 shows the front panel of the EF8F. Figure 4-2 Front panel of the EF8F
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
EF8F
Indicators
The front panel of the EF8F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3, L/ A4, L/A5, L/A6, L/A7, and L/A8. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
STAT SRV L/A1 L/A2 L/A3 L/A4 L/A5 L/A6 L/A7 L/A8
84
Ports
Table 4-4 Ports on an EF8F board Port IN1IN8 Descripti on Input ports for the first to eighth FE optical signals Output ports for the first to eighth FE optical signals Connector Type LC SFP optical module
OUT IN
Pin Assignment l OUT represents the transmit port. l IN represents the receive port.
Required Cable 16.1 Fiber Jumper
OUT1OUT8
4.1.5 DIP Switches and Jumpers

None.
4.1.6 Valid Slots

The EF8F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 3 and 5 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 4 and 6. The logical slots of the EF8F on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
4.1.7 Feature Code

None.

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 4-5 lists the technical specifications of the EF8F. Table 4-5 Technical Specifications of the EF8F Item Service ports Dimensions (H x W x D)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Performance For the specifications of the FE optical port, see Table 4-6, Table 4-7, and Table 4-8. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
85
Item Weight Power consumption
Performance 0.55 kg 23 W
Table 4-6 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmissio n distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 100BASE-FX Multi-mode LC 2 100BASE-LX Single-mode LC 15 100BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 100BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10
10
8.2
10
10
Table 4-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Parameter Type of optical interface Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Value 100Base-BX 15 Single-mode LC 40 Single-mode LC
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
86
Parameter Operating transmit wavelength (nm) Operating receive wavelength (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1550 1310 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 1310 1550 1550 1310 -5 to 0 -32 -10 10 1310 1550
Table 4-8 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 148810.00 84459.00 45290.00 23496.00 11973.00 9615.00 8126.00 6188.00 1299.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 744050.00 422295.00 226450.00 117480.00 59865.00 48075.00 40635.00 30940.00 6459.00
44.90 65.90 106.50 182.20 241.10 269.20 292.20 341.90 1133.30
4.2 EM6T/EM6F
The EM6T/EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.

The functional version of the EM6T/EM6F is TNM1.

The EM6T/EM6F receives/transmits and processes four FE signals and two GE signals. Table 4-9 lists the functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports. The EM6T/EM6F needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions. Table 4-9 Functions and features that the EM6T/EM6F supports Function and Feature Basic functions Board EM6T EM6F
Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service signals. 2.5 Gbit/s Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.
Backplane bus bandwidth Port specifica tions FE electrical port FE optical port
l GE ports can function as FE optical ports if pluggable FE optical modules are used. The following types of FE optical ports are supported: 100BASE-BX/ 100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/ 100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX l The following types of small formfactor pluggable (SFP) modules are supported: FE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module FE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
88
Function and Feature GE port
Board EM6T Provides two fixed ports: l 10/100BASE-T(X) l 1000BASE-T EM6F l Provides two GE ports by using SFP modules of any of the following types: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASELX/1000BASE-VX/1000BASEZX/1000Base-T l The following types of SFP modules are supported: GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module GE pluggable electrical module l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.
Port attributes
Working mode
l The FE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and autonegotiation. l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex. l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M halfduplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M fullduplex, and auto-negotiation. l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and autonegotiation.
TAG attributes Traffic control at ports Port type query Query and setting of optical power thresholds
l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supported Not supported Supported
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
89
Function and Feature Packet services E-Line services
Board EM6T l Native ETH services: E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent transmission E-Line services based on virtual local area networks (VLANs) E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services: ELine services carried by PWs (VPWS services) EM6F
E-LAN services
Ethernet data frame format Jumbo frame Maximum transmissio n unit (MTU) Protectio n schemes Tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) Pseudo wire (PW) APS Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II
Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being the default value.
Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.
Supports 1:1 PW APS.
Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
90
Function and Feature Link aggregatio n group (LAG) Link-state pass through (LPT) Quality of service (QoS)
Board EM6T EM6F
l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
l DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (CVLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets. l Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, CVLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies. l QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies. l Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy. l CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI ingresses. l Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. l Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping. l Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
91
Function and Feature Mainten ance features Multiproto col Label Switching (MPLS)/ Multiproto col label switching transport profile (MPLSTP) operation, administrat ion and maintenanc e (OAM) Ethernet OAM (ETH OAM)
Board EM6T EM6F
l Ethernet service OAM: Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag. Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with reference to ITU-T Y.7131. l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) Board power consumption query Board voltage detection Board temperature detection SFP module information query Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON]) Hot board swapping Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules Port mirroring l Supports local port mirroring. l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction of a UNI port.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
92
Function and Feature Synchro nization Synchrono us Ethernet
Board EM6T EM6F
Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at six ports.

NOTE SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
Data communication network (DCN) Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping
Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel. Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EM6T/EM6F.

Figure 4-3 EM6T/EM6F board function block diagram
Backplane GE signal GE signal access unit Control signal Service processing unit FE signal access unit Control signal FE signal Control bus of the board Ethernet signal Ethernet signal Packet switching unit
Logic control unit
System control bus
Power supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
93

Table 4-10 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EM6T/EM6F Step 1 Function Unit GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives GE/FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE/FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, and cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) for frame signals. 2 Service processing unit Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets. 3 Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and standby packet switching units.

Table 4-11 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EM6T/EM6F Step 1 Function Unit Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit Processing Flow l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
94
Step 3
Function Unit GE signal access unit/FE signal access unit
Processing Flow l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and CRC code computing. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated GE/ FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the service processing unit and the dual-fed and selectivereceiving unit using the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses, alarms, and performance events reported by units on the board to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock signals to the other units on the board.
4.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the EM6T
EM6T
STAT PROG SRV
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
EM6T
95
Figure 4-5 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 LINK2
GE1
GE2
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE4
Indicators
The front panel of the EM6T has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and PROG. The front panel of the EM6F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, PROG, LINK1, and LINK2. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-12 Ports on an EM6T/EM6F board Port FE1, FE2, FE3, FE4 GE1 / GE2 Bo ard EM 6T/ EM 6F EM 6T Descri ption FE service port GE service port (fixed electric al port) FE/GE service port (using SFP module s) Connector Type RJ45
87 65 4 32 1
Pin Assignment
Required Cable
RJ45
EM 6F
GE electrical port: SFP electrical module FE/GE optical port: LC SFP optical module
TX RX
The FE ports and GE electrical ports support the MDI, MDI-X, and autoMDI/MDI-X modes. Table 4-14 and Table 4-15 provide the pin assignments for an RJ45 port in different modes.
16.10 Network Cable
l TX represents the transmit port. l RX represents the receive port.
16.1 Fiber Jumper
Table 4-13 Status explanation for indicators on an Ethernet port Indicator LINK (green) State On Meaning The Ethernet link is working properly.
96
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
EM6F
Indicator
State Off
Meaning The Ethernet link is interrupted. The port is receiving or transmitting data. The port is not receiving or transmitting data.
ACT (yellow)
On or blinking Off
Table 4-14 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-TX Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Table 4-15 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-TX Signal 1 2 RX+ RXFunction Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
97
Pin
10/100BASE-TX Signal Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)
3 4 5 6 7 8
TX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

None.
4.2.6 Valid Slots

The EM6T/EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the EM6T/EM6F on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
4.2.7 Feature Code

None.

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 4-16 lists the technical specifications of the EM6T/EM6F.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
98
Table 4-16 Technical specifications of the EM6T/EM6F Item Service ports FE1, FE2, FE3, FE4 GE1, GE2 FE electrical port Performance See Table 4-17 and Table 4-18.
FE optical port GE electrical port GE optical port
See Table 4-19, Table 4-20, and Table 4-21. See Table 4-17 and Table 4-22. By using different SFP modules, the equipment provides GE optical ports with different application codes and transmission distances. For port specifications, see Table 4-23, Table 4-24, Table 4-26, and Table 4-25.
Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm l EM6T: 0.37 kg l EM6F: 0.40 kg
Power consumption
l EM6T: 10.4 W l EM6F: 11.3 W
Table 4-17 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's Ethernet electrical ports Service Port GE/FE electrical port GE/FE electrical port GE electrical port Port Rate 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T Code Pattern Manchester coding signals MLT-3 coding signals 4D-PAM5 coding signals Port Type RJ45
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
99
Table 4-18 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE electrical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 148810.00 84459.00 45290.00 23496.00 11973.00 9615.00 8126.00 6188.00 1299.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 744050.00 422295.00 226450.00 117480.00 59865.00 48075.00 40635.00 30940.00 6459.00
12.80 17.90 28.00 48.40 89.40 109.80 129.00 167.50 773.10
Table 4-19 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmissio n distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Value 100BASE-FX Multi-mode LC 2 100BASE-LX Single-mode LC 15 100BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 100BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
100
Item Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 10 8.2 10 10
Table 4-20 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Parameter Type of optical interface Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelength (nm) Operating receive wavelength (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 100Base-BX 15 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 1310 1550 40 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -5 to 0 -32 -10 10 1310 1550
Table 4-21 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 148810.00 84459.00 45290.00 23496.00 11973.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 744050.00 422295.00 226450.00 117480.00 59865.00
44.90 65.90 106.50 182.20 241.10
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
101
Item Frame Length (Bytes) 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00
Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 9615.00 8126.00 6188.00 1299.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 48075.00 40635.00 30940.00 6459.00
269.20 292.20 341.90 1133.30
Table 4-22 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00 309405.00 64970.00
7.00 7.40 8.40 10.60 14.70 17.00 18.90 22.60 83.40
Table 4-23 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Value 1000BASE-SX Multi-mode LC 0.5 1000BASE-LX Single-mode LC 10 1000BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 1000BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
102
Item Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
-17
-20
-23
-23
-3
-3
-3
Table 4-24 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Paramete r Type of optical interface Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Value 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
10
40
1310
1490
1310
1490
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
103
Paramete r Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value -9 to -3 -2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
9.00 11.80 17.30 25.00 29.20 31.30 33.40 37.40 98.00
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
104
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 -19
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9 8.2
4.3 EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.

The functional version of the EG4C is TNM1.

The EG4C receives/transmits and processes 4xFE/GE signals. Table 4-27 lists the functions and features that the EG4C supports. The EG4C needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
105
Table 4-27 Functions and features that the EG4C supports Function and Feature Basic functions Board Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals, and process these signals by working with the packet switching unit. 5 Gbit/s Provides optical/electrical ports for 4xFE/GE signals. On the front panel of an EG4C board, the first four ports are optical ports using small form-factor pluggable (SFP) optical modules, and the last four ports are fixed electrical ports. The ports with the same ID cannot be used simultaneously. l The following types of fixed GE electrical ports are supported: 1000BASE-T l The following types of FE SFP optical modules are supported: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/ 100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX l The following types of GE SFP optical modules are supported: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/ 1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX l The following types of SFP modules are supported: FE/GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module FE/GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. Port attributes Working mode l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and autonegotiation. l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex. TAG attributes Traffic control function Port type query Query and setting of optical power thresholds l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
106
Function and Feature Packet services Ethernet line (ELine) services
Board l Native ETH services: E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent transmission E-Line services based on virtual local area networks (VLANs) E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
Ethernet local area network (ELAN) services
Ethernet data frame format Jumbo frame Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Protection schemes Tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) Pseudo wire (PW) APS Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS)
Supports 1:1 PW APS. Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y. 1344.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
107
Function and Feature Link aggregation group (LAG)
Board l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing Point-point and point-multipoint LPT l DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets. l Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on CVLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies. l QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies. l Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy. l CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI ingresses. l Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. l Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping. l Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Link-state pass through (LPT) Quality of service (QoS)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
108
Function and Feature Maintenance features Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)/ Multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLS-TP) operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)
Board l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported. l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance with ITUT Y.1711. l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement (LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST) (only packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication, and two-way delay measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1. l Ethernet service OAM: Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag. Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with reference to ITU-T Y.7131. l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Ethernet OAM (ETH OAM)
Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of Ethernet ports Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets Board power consumption query Board voltage detection Board temperature detection SFP module information query Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON]) Hot-swappable board Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules Port mirroring l Supports local port mirroring. l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction of a UNI port.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
109
Function and Feature Synchronizatio n Synchronous Ethernet IEEE 1588v2 IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) Data communication network (DCN) Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping
Board Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at four ports. Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at four ports. Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at four ports.
Provides one inband DCN channel at each GE port. Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EG4C.

Figure 4-6 EG4C board function block diagram
Backplane
FE/GE signal access unit
Control signal FE/GE signal
Ethernet signal
Ethernet signal Packet switching unit
Logic control unit
System control bus
Power supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Clock unit
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
110

Table 4-28 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EG4C Step 1 Function Unit FE/GE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives FE/GE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE/GE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, and cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) for frame signals. 2 Service processing unit Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets. 3 Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and standby packet switching units.

Table 4-29 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EG4C Step 1 Function Unit Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit Processing Flow l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
111
Step 3
Function Unit FE/GE signal access unit
Processing Flow l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and CRC code computing. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated FE/ GE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control signals. The logic control unit controls the service processing unit and the dual-fed and selectivereceiving unit using the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit to other units on the EG4C; it also transmits the response messages, alarms, and performance events from other units on the EG4C to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
l l The clock unit receives the system clock from the control bus on the backplane, and supplies clock signals to other units on the EG4C. The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages and IEEE 1588 ACR messages from the FE/GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time synchronization. The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock.
4.3.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-7 Front panel of the EG4C
OUT 1/IN 1 OUT 2/IN 2 OUT 3/IN 3 OUT 4/IN 4
E G4C
STAT SRV L/A1 L/A2 L/A3 L/A4
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
112
Indicators
The front panel of the EG4C has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3, and L/A4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-30 Ports on an EG4C board Port GE1GE4 Descrip tion GE service port (fixed electrica l port) RJ45
87 65 4 32 1
Connector Type
Pin Assignment The GE electrical ports support the medium dependent interface (MDI), medium dependent interface crossover (MDI-X), and auto-MDI/MDI-X modes. Table 4-32 and Table 4-33 provide the pin assignments for an RJ45 port in different modes. l OUT represents the transmit port. l IN represents the receive port.
FE/GE service port (using SFP modules )
LC SFP optical module

OUT IN
16.1 Fiber Jumper
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
113
Table 4-33 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-TX Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
114
Pin
10/100BASE-TX Signal Function -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Reserved
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EG4C. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

None.
4.3.6 Valid Slots

The EG4C can be inserted in slots 3-6, and slots 4 and 6 are preferred. The logical slots of the EG4C on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
4.3.7 Feature Code

None.

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 4-34 lists the technical specifications of the EG4C. Table 4-34 Technical Specifications of the EG4C Item Service ports GE1GE4 GE electrical port Performance See Table 4-35 and Table 4-36.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
115
Item FE/GE optical port
Performance By using various SFP modules, the equipment provides FE/GE optical ports with various application codes and transmission distances. For FE optical port specifications, see Table 4-37, Table 4-38, and Table 4-39. For GE optical port specifications, see Table 4-40, Table 4-41, Table 4-43, and Table 4-42.
Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.45 kg l 4xGE optical ports: 12.5 W l 4xGE electrical ports: 11.0 W
Table 4-35 Specifications of the EG4C Ethernet electrical ports Service Port GE electrical port Port Rate 1000BASE-T Code Pattern 4D-PAM5 coding signals Port Type RJ45
Table 4-36 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00
7.00 7.40 8.40 10.60 14.70 17.00 18.90
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
116
Item Frame Length (Bytes) 2000.00 9600.00
Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 309405.00 64970.00
22.60 83.40
Table 4-37 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmissio n distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 100BASE-FX Multi-mode LC 2 100BASE-LX Single-mode LC 15 100BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 100BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80
1270 to 1380
1261 to 1360
1263 to 1360
1480 to 1580
-19 to -14
-15 to -8
-5 to 0
-5 to 0
-30
-28
-34
-34
-14
-8
-10
-10
10
8.2
10
10
Table 4-38 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Parameter Type of optical interface Value 100Base-BX
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
117
Parameter Transmission distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelength (nm) Operating receive wavelength (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 15 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -15 to -8 -32 -8 8.5 1310 1550 40 Single-mode LC 1550 1310 -5 to 0 -32 -10 10 1310 1550
Table 4-39 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's FE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 148810.00 84459.00 45290.00 23496.00 11973.00 9615.00 8126.00 6188.00 1299.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 744050.00 422295.00 226450.00 117480.00 59865.00 48075.00 40635.00 30940.00 6459.00
44.90 65.90 106.50 182.20 241.10 269.20 292.20 341.90 1133.30
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
118
Table 4-40 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 1000BASE-SX Multi-mode LC 0.5 770 to 860 1000BASE-LX Single-mode LC 10 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80 1500 to 1580
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
-17
-20
-23
-23
-3
-3
-3
Table 4-41 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Paramete r Type of optical interface Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Value 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
10
40
119
Paramete r Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 1310 1490 1310 1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
9.00 11.80 17.30 25.00 29.20 31.30 33.40 37.40 98.00
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
120
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 -19
1471 to 1611, in steps of 20
-28
-9 8.2
4.4 EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.

The functional version of the EX1 is TNM1.

The EX1 receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals. Table 4-44 lists the functions and features that the EX1 supports. The EX1 needs to work with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to implement Ethernet service functions.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
121
Table 4-44 Functions and features that the EX1 supports Function and Feature Basic functions Board Receives/Transmits 10GE service signals, and process these signals by working with the packet switching unit. 10 Gbit/s l One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN), 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN), 10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN), 10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or 10GBASE-ZW (WAN) l A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port or a colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 70 km. A colored DWDM optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km. Port attributes Working mode TAG attributes Traffic control at ports Port type query Query and setting of optical power thresholds Packet services E-Line services Supports 10G full-duplex and supports the setting of the LAN mode or WAN mode. l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid. Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x. Supported Supported
l Native ETH services: E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent transmission E-Line services based on virtual local area networks (VLANs) E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ) l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
122
Function and Feature E-LAN services
Board l Native ETH services: E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges l ETH PWE3 services: E-LAN services carried by PWs (virtual private LAN services [VPLSs])
Ethernet data frame format Jumbo frame Maximum transmission unit (MTU) Protection schemes Tunnel automatic protection switching (APS) Pseudo wire (PW) APS Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) Link aggregation group (LAG)
Supports 1:1 PW APS. Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y. 1344.
l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing Point-point and point-multipoint LPT
Link-state pass through (LPT)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
123
Function and Feature Quality of service (QoS)
Board l DiffServ Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB service classes for service flows based on their QoS information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets. l Complex traffic classification Supports complex traffic classification based on CVLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, SVLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI ingress policies. l QoS policies Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies. l Access control list (ACL) policy Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy. l CAR Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-UNI ingresses. l Shaping Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow. l Congestion management Supports tail drop and WRED dropping. l Queue scheduling policies Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)/ Multiprotocol label switching transport profile (MPLS-TP) operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)
l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported. l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance with ITUT Y.1711. l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement (LM), locked signal function (LCK), test (TST) (only packet loss test supported), PW Client Signal Fail (CSF) indication, and two-way delay measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
124
Function and Feature ETH OAM
Board l Ethernet service OAM: Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag. Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with reference to ITU-T Y.7131. l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.
Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets Board power consumption query Board voltage detection Board temperature detection XFP module information query Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON]) Hot-swappable board Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules Port mirroring l Supports local port mirroring. l Supports mirroring in the egress direction of a UNI port. l Supports mirroring in the ingress direction of UNI and NNI ports. l Supports mirroring of PORT+VLAN services in the ingress direction of a UNI port. Synchronizatio n Synchronous Ethernet IEEE 1588v2 IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) Data communication network (DCN) Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one port. Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one port. Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at one port.
NOTE Ports working in 10GE WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588v2 or IEEE 1588 ACR.
Provides one inband DCN channel. Supported
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
125

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EX1.

Figure 4-8 EX1 board function block diagram
Backplane Ethernet signal 10GE signal access unit Control signal 10GE signal Ethernet signal Service processing unit Ethernet signal Dual-fed and selectivereceiving unit
Packet switching unit (active)
Packet switching unit (backup)
Logic control unit
System control bus
Power supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 4-45 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EX1 Step 1 Function Unit 10GE signal access unit Processing Flow l Receives 10GE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for 10GE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, and cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) for frame signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
126
Step 2
Function Unit Service processing unit
Processing Flow Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic classification and committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.
Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit
Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and standby packet switching units.

Table 4-46 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EX1 Step 1 Function Unit Dual-fed and selective-receiving unit Processing Flow l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet switching unit. l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet processing unit. Works with the system control, switching, and timing board to provide the following functions: l Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets. l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames. l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames. l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets. 3 10GE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and CRC code computing. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated 10GE signals through Ethernet ports.

The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit
to other units on the EX1; it also transmits the response messages, alarms, and performance events from other units on the EX1 to the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
l l l The clock unit receives the system clock from the control bus on the backplane, and supplies clock signals to other units on the EX1. The clock unit processes IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR protocol packets. The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock.
4.4.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-9 Front panel of the EX1
OUT IN
EX1
Indicators
The front panel of the EX1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and L/A. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-47 Ports on an EX1 board Port IN Descrip tion Receives 10GE signals. Transmit s 10GE signals. Connector Type XFP optical module
OUT IN
STAT SRV L/A
Pin Assignment l OUT represents the transmit port. l IN represents the receive port.
OUT
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
128
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EX1. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

None.
4.4.6 Valid Slots

The EX1 can be inserted in slot 1 (preferred) or slot 2. Its logical slot on the network management system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
4.4.7 Feature Code

None.

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 4-48 lists the technical specifications of the EX1. Table 4-48 Technical specifications of the EX1 Item Service ports Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Performance For 10GE optical port specifications, see Table 4-49, Table 4-50, and Table 4-51. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.48 kg 11 W
Table 4-49 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's 10GE optical ports Item Optical port type Value 10GBASE-SR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-SW (WAN) Multi-mode LC 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-LW (WAN) Single-mode LC 10GBASE-ER (LAN)/ 10GBASE-EW (WAN) Single-mode LC 10GBASE-ZR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-ZW (WAN) Single-mode LC
Optical fiber type

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
129
Item Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 0.3 840 to 860 10 1260 to 1330 40 1530 to 1565 80 1530 to 1565
-1.3 to -7.3
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to 4
-7.5
-11
-15
-24
-1
0.5
-1
-7
8.2
Table 4-50 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM) Parameter Value CWDM Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Operating wavelength range (nm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Single-mode LC 70 0 to 4 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23 l 1571 nm: -22 l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21 Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) -9 8.2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
130
Table 4-51 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM) Parameter Value DWDM Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s Type of fiber Transmission distance (km) Launched optical power range (dBm) Central frequency (THz) Central frequency deviation (GHz) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Single-mode LC 40 -1 to +2 80 -1 to +3
192.1 to 196.0 10 -17 -1 9.5
192.1 to 196.0 10 -24 -9 8.2
4.5 MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

The functional version of the MD1 is TNM1.

The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. Table 4-52 lists the functions and features that the MD1 supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
131
Table 4-52 Functions and features that the MD1 supports Function and Feature Basic functions E1 service categories Description Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible configuration of E1 service categories. Supports the following E1 service categories: l CES E1 l ATM/IMA E1 Port specifications ATM/IMA Maximum number of ATM services Maximum number of ATM connections ATM traffic managemen t ATM encapsulati on mode Provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 ports. l Local: 32 l Remote: 64
l Local: 128 l Remote: 256
Supported
Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes: l N-to-one VPC l N-to-one VCC l One-to-one VPC l One-to-one VCC
Maximum number of concatenate d ATM cells ATM OAM
31
Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level), including the following functions: l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication (RDI) l Continuity check test l Loopback test
Maximum number of IMA groups
32
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
132
Function and Feature Maximum number of members in an IMA group CES Maximum number of services Encapsulati on mode
Description 16
32
Supports the following encapsulation modes: l CESoPSN l SAToP
Service category Compressio n of vacant slots Jitter buffering time (us) Packet loading time (us) Synchroni zation CES ACR
Point-to-point services Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)
375-16000
125-5000
Supported
NOTE Supports CES ACR for a maximum of four channels. The clock information that is recovered from the services transported at ports 116 can be sent out only from ports 116; the clock information that is recovered from the services transported at ports 1732 can be sent out only from ports 1732.
Retiming Maintenan ce features Loopback Cold reset and warm reset PRBS tests at E1 ports Board manufacturi ng information query
Supports tributary retiming and system retiming. Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports. Supported (with warm resets having no impact on services)
Supported Supported
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
133
Function and Feature Board power consumptio n information query
Description Supported

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the MD1.
Functional Block Diagram

Figure 4-10 Functional block diagram of the MD1
Backplane
Logic processing unit
E1
Signal interface unit
Service bus
GE bus
E1
Control bus
Logic control unit Fuse -48 V/-60 V
Power supply unit
-48 V/-60 V Clock signal provided to the other units of the board Clock unit
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
134

Table 4-53 Signal processing in the receive direction of the MD1 Step 1 Function Unit Signal interface unit Processing Flow l Receives external E1 signals. l Matches the resistance. l Equalizes signals. l Converts the level. l Restores clock signals. l Buffers the received data. l Performs HDB3 decoding. 2 Service processing unit l Frames E1 signals. l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA services. l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3 services into Ethernet services. 4 Logic processing unit l Shifts transmission of service signals from the internal service bus to the GE bus in the backplane. l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.

Table 4-54 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the MD1 Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Receives service signals from the packet switching unit. l Shifts transmission of service signals from the GE bus in the backplane to the internal service bus. 2 Service processing unit l Decapsulates service signals. l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA services. l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1 signals to the signal interface unit. 3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding. l Performs clock re-timing. l Shapes pulses. l Drives the line. l Sends E1 signals to a port.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
135

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. l l The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
4.5.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-11 Front panel of the MD1
MD1
STAT SRV
16 1 17
32
Indicators
The front panel of the MD1 has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
136
Ports
Table 4-55 Ports on an MD1 board Port 1 to 16 Descript ion The first to sixteenth E1 ports The seventeen th to thirtysecond E1 ports Connector Type Anea 96
POS.1
Pin Assignment See Table 4-56.
Required Cable 16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable
17 to 32
POS.96
Table 4-56 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
137
Pin 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53
Signal The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
Pin 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77
Signal The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
138
Pin 54 55 56
Signal The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 78 79 80
Signal The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

None.
4.5.6 Valid Slots

The MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the MD1 on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
4.5.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the MD1 indicates the E1 port impedance. Table 4-57 Feature codes of the MD1 Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 75 120

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 4-58 lists the technical specifications of the MD1. Table 4-58 Technical specifications of the MD1 Item E1 ports (1-16 and 17-32) Dimensions (H x W x D)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Performance See Table 4-59. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm
139
Item Weight Power consumption
Performance 0.50 kg 12.2 W
Table 4-59 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports Item Standard compliance Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Impedance (ohm) Pair in each direction Port type Value ITU-T G.703/G.823 2048 HDB3 75 One coaxial pair Anea 96 120 One symmetrical pair
4.6 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.

The functional version of CQ1 boards is TNM1.

CQ1 boards receive and transmit four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical signals. Table 4-60 lists the functions and features supported by CQ1 boards. Table 4-60 Functions and features that CQ1 boards support Function and Feature Basic functions Supported packet service types Port specificati ons Optical ports Description Receives/Transmits four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical signals. l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1 l ML-PPP E1 l Provides four STM-1 SFP optical ports, which can be S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical ports. l Supports single-fiber bidirectional optical modules.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Function and Feature Electrical ports CES Maximum number of services Encapsulation mode
Description l Use SFP electrical modules. l Comply with ITU-T G.703. 252
l CESoPSN (CESoPSN stands for circuit emulation services over packet switch networks) l SAToP (SAToP stands for Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet)
Idle timeslot compression Jitter buffering time (us) Packet loading time (us) CES ACR (ACR stands for adaptive clock recovery) Transparent transmission of SDH overheads in packet networks ML-PPP Type of links carrying MLPPP links Maximum number of supported PPP links Maximum number of supported ML-PPP groups
Supported only in CESoPSN mode 375 to 16,000
125 to 5,000
Supported, but the NE can only function as a master node
D1 to D12, E1, and E2 bytes
VC-12s in channelized STM-1s (service type: PWE3 over tunnel) 252
32
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
141
Function and Feature Maximum number of links in one ML-PPP group Linear multiplex section protection (LMSP) on the packet plane Synchroni zation Clock source
Description 16
1:1 LMSP
NOTE A CQ1 board and a TDM service board, such as SL1D/SL1Q, cannot be configured into the same 1:1 LMSP protection group.
l Each line port provides one channel of SDH line clock signals. l Each board supports two channels of E1 clock signals over its STM-1 ports.
SDH line clock DCN Outband DCN
Supported Each SDH line port can provide one data communications channel (DCC) that is composed of three DCC bytes or nine DCC bytes. Transmits DCN information over ML-PPP links. l Supports inloops at STM-1 ports. l Supports outloops at STM-1 ports. l Supports inloops over E1 channels. l Supports outloops over E1 channels.
Inband DCN Maintenan ce features Loopback
Warm and cold resetting Switching a laser on or off Pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) testing Manufacturer information querying Power consumption querying
Supported Supported Not supported
Supported
Supported
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
142
Function and Feature SFP module information detecting and querying
Description Supported

This section describes how the function units of a CQ1 board process channelized STM-1 optical signals.

Figure 4-12 CQ1 board function block diagram
Backplane
Channelized STM-1 signal
Signal access unit
STM-1 signal
SDH processing unit
E1 signal
Packet processing unit
GE signal
Logic processing unit
GE bus
Control bus
Line clock signal
Logic control unit Line clock signal Clock signal provided to other units on the board Clock unit System clock signal
Power supply unit
Fuse
-48 V/-60 V System power System power -48 V/-60 V
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
143

Table 4-61 Signal processing in the receive direction of a CQ1 board Step 1 Function Unit Signal interface unit Processing Flow l Receives channelized STM-1 signals. l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Checks for R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1 electrical signals. 2 SDH processing unit l Restores clock signals. l Synchronizes frames and checks for R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Descrambles signals. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates alarms and performance events, if any. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates alarms and performance events, if any. l Checks for changes in Synchronization Status Messages (SSMs) in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes (including F1 and serial bytes), DCC bytes, and K bytes, and transmits the bytes to the logic processing unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates performance events, if any. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates alarms and performance events, if any. l Decapsulates E1 signals from the STM-1 signals. 3 Packet processing unit l Frames E1 signals. l Performs CES emulation. l Performs Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MP-PPP) processing. l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts them into Ethernet services. 4 Logic processing unit l Grooms services from service buses to the GE bus on the backplane. l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
144

Table 4-62 Signal processing in the transmit direction of a CQ1 board Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Receives service signals from the packet switching unit. l Grooms services from the GE bus on the backplane to service buses. 2 Packet processing unit l Decapsulates service signals. l Restructures CES packets. l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1 signals to the SDH processing unit. 3 SDH processing unit l Multiplexes E1 signals into STM-1 signals. l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Scrambles signals. 4 Signal interface unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The CQ1 board is directly controlled by a CPU on the system control and communication unit. The CPU issues configuration and query commands to other units of the board over the control bus. These units send command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V/-60 V power supplies from the backplane. It then converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power and supplies the +3.3 V power to other units on the board.
Clock Unit
The clock unit performs the following operations: l l Extracts line clock signals or E1 clock signals and transmits them to the system control and communication unit. Receives system clock signals from the control bus on the backplane and supplies clock signals to other units on the board.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
145
4.6.4 Front Panel

A CQ1 board has indicators and STM-1 ports on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 4-13 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing optical ports
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
CQ1
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
Figure 4-14 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing electrical ports

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
CQ1
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
Indicators
The front panel of the CQ1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 4-63 Ports on a CQ1 board Port OUT1 to OUT4 Description Transmit ports of the first to fourth STM-1 ports Receive ports of the first to fourth STM-1 ports Connector Type l LC (with an SFP optical module)
OUT IN
LOS4
SRV
LOS4
SRV
Required Cable l 16.1 Fiber Jumper for SFP optical modules l 16.6 STM-1 Cable for SFP electrical modules
IN
IN1 to IN4
l SAA straight female (with an SFP electrical module)

OUT
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the CQ1. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

None.
4.6.6 Valid Slots

A CQ1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 6. The priorities of the slots are as follows: slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. Its logical slot on the network management system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
4.6.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. CQ1 boards have feature codes. Table 4-64 Feature codes of the CQ1 Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of Optical Port S-1.1, eSFP optical module L-1.1, eSFP optical module L-1.2, eSFP optical module S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm; for optical ports 3 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm.)

This section describes board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption. Table 4-65 lists the technical specifications of the CQ1. Table 4-65 Technical specifications of the CQ1 Item Service ports Electrical port Optical port Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Performance See Table 4-66. See Table 4-67 and Table 4-68. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.47 kg 11.5 W
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
147
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
148
Item
Value
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
149
5 SDH Boards
5
About This Chapter
5.1 SL1D The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board. 5.2 SL1Q The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board. 5.3 SL4D The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.
SDH Boards
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the following SDH boards: SL1D, SL1Q, and SL4D.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
150
5 SDH Boards
5.1 SL1D
The SL1D is a 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.

The functional version of the SL1D is TNH2.

The SL1D receives/transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line. Table 5-1 lists the functions and features that the SL1D supports. Table 5-1 Functions and features that the SL1D supports Function and Feature Basic functions Optical port specifications Board l Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals. l Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports. STM-1 optical ports support SFP electrical modules. l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957. Optical module specifications l Optical module information can be detected and queried. l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used. l Pluggable optical modules support hot swapping. l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used, their information can be queried, and their running status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance. l Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. DCN Service processing Overhead processing l Supports outband DCN. l Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services. l Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals. l Transparently transmits or terminates path overheads. l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes. Alarms and performance events l Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
151
5 SDH Boards
Function and Feature Protection schemes
Board l Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring multiplex section protection (MSP). l Supports linear MSP. l Supports sub-network connection protection (SNCP).
l Inloops and outloops at optical ports l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating l Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received l Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports l Pass-through tests of line K bytes l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade thresholds l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) l Board manufacturing information query l In-service FPGA loading l Hot board swapping l ALS

The SL1D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control unit, and a clock unit.

Figure 5-1 Functional block diagram of the SL1D
Backplane
O/E conversion unit
STM-1
Service bus Overhead bus
Cross-connect unit System control and communication unit System control and communication unit +3.3 V
Overhead processing unit
STM-1
Control bus Power supplied to the other units on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit
Logic control unit
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
152
5 SDH Boards

Table 5-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1D Step 1 Function Unit O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1 electrical signals. 2 Overhead processing unit l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Descrambles signals. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
153
5 SDH Boards

Table 5-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1D Step 1 Function Unit Overhead processing unit Processing Flow l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Scrambles signals. 2 O/E conversion unit l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
5.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 5-2 shows the front panel of the SL1D. Figure 5-2 Front panel of the SL1D
SL1D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
SL1D
154
5 SDH Boards
Indicators
The front panel of the SL1D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 5-4 Ports on an SL1D board Port TX1/ RX1 Descripti on Receive/ Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical/ electrical port Receive/ Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical/ electrical port Connector Type Optical port: LC SFP optical module
TX RX
Pin Assignment l TX represents the transmit port. l RX represents the receive port.
Required Cable SFP optical port: 16.1 Fiber Jumper SFP electrical port: 16.6 STM-1 Cable
Electrical port: SFP electrical module

TX RX
TX2/ RX2
Labels

None.
5.1.6 Valid Slots

The SL1D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL1D on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
5.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. SL1D boards have feature codes.
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-5 Feature codes of the SL1D Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of Optical Port S-1.1, eSFP optical module L-1.1, eSFP optical module L-1.2, eSFP optical module S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm; for optical port 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.) L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm; for optical port 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
05

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 5-6 lists the technical specifications of the SL1D. Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the SL1D Item Service ports TX1/ RX1 TX2/ RX2 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Receive/Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical/electrical port Receive/Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical/electrical port Performance For the performance of STM-1 optical ports, see Table 5-8 and Table 5-9. For the performance of STM-1 electrical ports, see Table 5-7.
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.30 kg 3.5 W
Table 5-7 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports Item Bit rate Code pattern
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Value 155520 kbit/s CMI

5 SDH Boards
Item Connector Signal bit rate at the output port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance
Value SAA straight female Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
157
5 SDH Boards
5.2 SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.

The functional version of SL1Q boards is TNH2.

The SL1Q receives/transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line. Table 5-10 lists the functions and features that the SL1Q supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
158
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-10 Functions and features that the SL1Q supports Function and Feature Basic functions Optical port specifications Board Receives/Transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals. l Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports. STM-1 optical ports support SFP electrical modules. l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957. Optical module specifications l Optical module information can be detected and queried. l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used. l Pluggable optical modules support hot swapping. l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance. l Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. DCN Service processing Overhead processing Supports outband DCN. Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services. l Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals. l Processes higher order path overheads. l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through. l Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte channels. l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes. Pointer processing Alarms and performance events Protection schemes Processes AU pointers. Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance. l Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP. l Supports linear MSP. l Supports SNCP.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
159
5 SDH Boards
Function and Feature Maintenance features
Board l Inloops and outloops at optical ports l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating l Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received l Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports l Pass-through tests of line K bytes l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade thresholds l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) l Board manufacturing information query l In-service FPGA loading l Hot board swapping l ALS

The SL1Q consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control unit, and a clock unit. Figure 5-3 SL1Q board function block diagram
Backplane
O/E conversion unit
STM-1
STM-1
Logic control unit
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
160
5 SDH Boards

Table 5-11 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1Q Step 1 Function Unit O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1 electrical signals. 2 Overhead processing unit l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Descrambles signals. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit.

Table 5-12 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1Q Step 1 Function Unit Overhead processing unit Processing Flow l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Scrambles signals.
5 SDH Boards
Step 2
Function Unit O/E conversion unit
Processing Flow l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and communication unit.
Clock Unit
5.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 5-4 Front panel of the SL1Q
SL1Q
TX3/RX3
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2 LOS3 LOS4
TX4/RX4
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL1Q has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3, and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 5-13 Ports on an SL1Q board Port Description Connector Type Pin Assignme nt l TX represen ts the Required Cable SFP optical port: 16.1 Fiber Jumper
162
TX1/ RX1
Receive/Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical/electrical port
STM-1/4/16 optical port: LC SFP optical module
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
5 SDH Boards
Port
Description
Connector Type
Pin Assignme nt transmit port. l RX represen ts the receive port.
Required Cable SFP electrical port: 16.6 STM-1 Cable
TX2/ RX2 TX3/ RX3 TX4/ RX4
Receive/Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical/electrical port Receive/Transmit port of the third STM-1 optical/electrical port Receive/Transmit port of the fourth STM-1 optical/electrical port
TX
RX
STM-1 electrical port: SFP electrical module

TX RX
Labels

The SL1Q does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
5.2.6 Valid Slots

The SL1Q can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis.
5.2.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. SL1Q boards have feature codes. Table 5-14 Feature codes of the SL1Q Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of Optical Port S-1.1, eSFP optical module L-1.1, eSFP optical module L-1.2, eSFP optical module S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and 3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
5 SDH Boards
Feature Code 05
Type of Optical Port L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1 and 3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)

This section describes the board specifications, including the optical port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 5-15 lists the technical specifications of the SL1Q. Table 5-15 Technical specifications of the SL1Q Item Service ports TX1/ RX1 TX2/ RX2 TX3/ RX3 TX3/ RX3 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Receive/Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical/electrical port Receive/Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical/electrical port Receive/Transmit port of the third STM-1 optical/electrical port Receive/Transmit port of the fourth STM-1 optical/electrical port 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.30 kg 4.5 W Performance For the performance of STM-1 optical ports, see Table 5-17 and Table 5-18. For the performance of STM-1 electrical ports, see Table 5-16.
Table 5-16 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports Item Bit rate Code pattern Connector Signal bit rate at the output port Value 155520 kbit/s CMI SAA straight female Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
164
5 SDH Boards
Item Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance
Value
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
165
5 SDH Boards
5.3 SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.

The functional version of the SL4D is TNH2.

The SL4D receives/transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for STM-4 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line. Table 5-19 lists the functions and features that the SL4D supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
166
5 SDH Boards
Table 5-19 Functions and features that the SL4D supports Function and Feature Basic functions Optical port specifications Board l Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals. l Provides S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 optical ports. l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957. Optical module specifications l Optical module information can be detected and queried. l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used. l Pluggable optical modules support hot swapping. l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used, their information can be queried, and their running status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance. l Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function. DCN Service processing Overhead processing l Supports outband DCN. l Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4c concatenated services. l Processes the section overheads of STM-4 signals. l Processes higher order path overheads. l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and passthrough. l Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte channels. l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes. Pointer processing Alarms and performance events l Processes AU pointers. l Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance. l Supports two-fiber unidirectional/bidirectional ring MSP. l Supports linear MSP. l Supports SNCP.
Protection schemes
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
167
5 SDH Boards
Function and Feature Maintenance features
Board l Inloops and outloops at optical ports l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating l Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received l Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports l Pass-through tests of line K bytes l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade thresholds l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) l Board manufacturing information query l In-service FPGA loading l Hot board swapping l ALS

The SL4D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control unit, and a clock unit.

Figure 5-5 Functional block diagram of the SL4D
Backplane
O/E conversion unit
STM-4
STM-4
Logic control unit
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
168
5 SDH Boards

Table 5-20 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL4D Step 1 Function Unit O/E conversion unit Processing Flow l Regenerates STM-4 optical signals. l Detects R_LOS alarms. l Converts STM-4 optical signals into electrical signals. 2 Overhead processing unit l Restores clock signals. l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. l Descrambles signals. l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports the SSM status to the system control and communication unit. l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system control and communication unit. l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific performance events. l Checks higher order path overheads and generates specific alarms and performance events. l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4 signals to the cross-connect unit.

Table 5-21 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL4D Step 1 Function Unit Overhead processing unit Processing Flow l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Sets higher order path overheads. l Sets AU pointers. l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes. l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes. l Scrambles signals.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
169
5 SDH Boards
Step 2
Function Unit O/E conversion unit
Processing Flow l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
5.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 5-6 shows the front panel of the SL4D. Figure 5-6 Front panel of the SL4D
SL4D
STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL4D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
170
5 SDH Boards
Ports
Table 5-22 Ports on an SL4D board Port TX1/ RX1 Descripti on Receive/ Transmit port of the first STM-4 optical port Receive/ Transmit port of the second STM-4 optical port Connector Type LC SFP optical module
TX RX
Pin Assignment l TX represents the transmit port. l RX represents the receive port.
TX2/ RX2
Labels

None.
5.3.6 Valid Slots

The SL4D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL4D on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
5.3.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. SL4D boards have feature codes. Table 5-23 Feature codes of the SL4D Feature Code 01 02 03
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Type of Optical Port S-4.1, eSFP optical module L-4.1, eSFP optical module L-4.2, eSFP optical module
171
5 SDH Boards
Feature Code 04
Type of Optical Port S-4.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the transmit wavelength is 1490 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm; for optical port 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1490 nm.)

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 5-24 lists the technical specifications of the SL4D. Table 5-24 Technical specifications of the SL4D Item Service ports TX1/ RX1 TX2/ RX2 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Receive/Transmit port of the first STM-4 optical port Receive/Transmit port of the second STM-4 optical port Performance For the performance of STM-4 optical ports, see Table 5-25 and Table 5-26.
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.30 kg 3.7 W
Table 5-25 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Item Nominal bit rate Optical port type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength range (nm) Optical fiber type Launched optical power range (dBm) Value 622080 kbit/s S-4.1 15 1274 to 1356 L-4.1 40 1280 to 1335 L-4.2 80 1480 to 1580
Single-mode LC -15 to -8
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
172
5 SDH Boards
Value -28 -8 8.2 -28 -8 10 -28 -8 10
Table 5-26 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 550's STM-4 optical ports Paramete r Nominal bit rate Line code pattern Type of optical interface Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Value 622080 kbit/s NRZ S-4.1 L-4.1
15
40
1310
1490
1310
1490
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
173
5 SDH Boards
Paramete r Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value -9 to -3 -2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
174
6 PDH Boards
6
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports PDH boards SP3D and PL3T. 6.1 SP3D The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board. 6.2 PL3T The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.
PDH Boards
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
175
6 PDH Boards
6.1 SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.

The functional version of the SP3D is TNH2.

The SP3D processes E1/T1 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events, and maintenance features. Table 6-1 lists the functions and features that the SP3D supports. Table 6-1 Functions and features that the SP3D supports Function and Feature Service processing Overhead processing Alarms and performance events Tributary clock sources Board Receives/Transmits and processes 42xE1/T1 signals. Processes path overheads at the VC-12 level such as J2 and V5. Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance. l Extracts clock signals from the first and seventeenth channels. l Supports the tributary retiming function. l Transmits E1 clock signals transparently. Maintenance features l Inloops and outloops at electrical ports l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) l Board manufacturing information query l PRBS tests TPS protection Not supported

The SP3D consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, a logic control unit, and a power supply unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
176
6 PDH Boards

Figure 6-1 Functional block diagram of the SP3D
Backplane E1/T1 signal E1/T1 Interface unit E1/T1 CODEC unit Mapping/De mapping unit Service bus Cross-connect unit
Control bus +3.3 V power supplied to the board
Logic control unit
System control and communication unit -48 V/-60 V
Power supply unit
Fuse
System power supply System power supply System clock signal
-48 V/-60 V Clock signal provided to the other units on the board Clock unit

Table 6-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3D Step 1 2 Function Unit Interface unit CODEC unit Processing Flow Couples external E1/T1 signals by using a transformer and then transmits the signals to the board. l Equalizes the received signals. l Restores clock signals. l Detects T_ALOS alarms. l Performs HDB3 decoding. 3 Mapping/ Demapping unit l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s. l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s. l Processes pointers to form TU-12s. l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form one TUG-2. l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to form one TUG-3. l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form one C-4. l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to form one VC-4.
6 PDH Boards
Step 4
Function Unit Logic processing unit
Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the active and standby cross-connect units.

Table 6-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3D Step 1 Function Unit Logic processing unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects specific alarms and performance events. l Extracts E1/T1 signals. 3 4 CODEC unit Interface unit Performs HDB3 coding. Couples E1/T1 signals by using a transformer and then transmits the signals to an external cable.
Mapping/ Demapping unit

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system control and communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
178
6 PDH Boards
Clock Unit
6.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SP3D. Figure 6-2 Front panel of the SP3D
SP3D
21
STAT SRV
42 22
Indicators
The front panel of the SP3D has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 6-4 Ports on an SP3D board Port 1-21 Descripti on Receives/ Transmits the first to twentyfirst E1/T1 signals. Receives/ Transmits the twentysecond to fortysecond E1/ T1 signals. Connector Type Anea 96
POS.1
Pin Assignment See Table 6-5.
Required Cable 16.8 21xE1/ T1 Cable
POS.96
22-42
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
SP3D
179
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-5 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Signal The first received E1 differential signal (+) The first received E1 differential signal (-) The second received E1 differential signal (+) The second received E1 differential signal (-) The third received E1 differential signal (+) The third received E1 differential signal (-) The fourth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventh received E1 differential signal (+) The seventh received E1 differential signal (-) The eighth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighth received E1 differential signal (-) The ninth received E1 differential signal (+) The ninth received E1 differential signal (-) Pin 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signal The first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The first transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The second transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The third transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The ninth transmitted E1 differential signal (-)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
180
6 PDH Boards
Pin 19 20 21 22 23 24 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
Signal The tenth received E1 differential signal (+) The tenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh received E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth received E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The seventeenth received E1 differential signal (+) The seventeenth received E1 differential signal (-) The eighteenth received E1 differential signal (+) The eighteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The nineteenth received E1 differential signal (+)
Pin 43 44 45 46 47 48 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85
Signal The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The tenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eleventh transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twelfth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The thirteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fourteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The fifteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The sixteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The seventeenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The seventeenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The eighteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The eighteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The nineteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
181
6 PDH Boards
Pin 62 63 64 65 66
Signal The nineteenth received E1 differential signal (-) The twentieth received E1 differential signal (+) The twentieth received E1 differential signal (-) The twenty-first received E1 differential signal (+) The twenty-first received E1 differential signal (-)
Pin 86 87 88 89 90
Signal The nineteenth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twentieth transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twentieth transmitted E1 differential signal (-) The twenty-first transmitted E1 differential signal (+) The twenty-first transmitted E1 differential signal (-)

None.
6.1.6 Valid Slots

The SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the SP3D on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
6.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SP3D indicates the E1/T1 port impedance. Table 6-6 Feature codes of the SP3D Feature Code A B Port Impedance (Ohm) 120 75

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-7 lists the technical specifications of the SP3D.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
182
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the SP3D Item Service ports 1-21 22-42 Receives/Transmits the first to twenty-first E1/T1 signals. Receives/Transmits the twentysecond to forty-second E1/T1 signals. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.85 kg 11.9 W Performance See Table 6-8.
Table 6-8 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E1/T1 electrical ports Electrical Port Type Code pattern Waveform at the output port Signal bit rate at the output port Allowed attenuation at the input port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Input jitter tolerance Anti-interference capability at the input port Reflection attenuation at the input and output ports Output jitter Mapping jitter Combined jitter Jitter transfer function Port type Anea 96 Complies with ITU-T G.742. Complies with ITU-T G.823. Complies with ITU-T G. 824. Complies with ITU-T G.823. Complies with ITU-T G.703. Complies with ITU-T G.703. 1544 kbit/s B8ZS code, AMI code 2048 kbit/s HDB3 code
Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824. Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
183
6 PDH Boards
6.2 PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.

The functional version of PL3T boards is TNH2.

The PL3T processes E3/T3 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events, and maintenance features. Table 6-9 lists the functions and features that the PL3T supports. Table 6-9 Functions and features that the PL3T supports Function and Feature Service processing Overhead processing Alarms and performance events Tributary clock sources Maintenance features Board Receives/Transmits and processes 3xE3/T3 signals. Sets and queries all path overheads at the VC-3 level. Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance. Extracts clock signals from the first and second channels. l Inloops and outloops at electrical ports l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact on services) l Board manufacturing information query l Board temperature detection l PRBS tests l Hot board swapping

The PL3T consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, and a logic control unit. This section describes how the PL3T processes one E3/T3 signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the PL3T. Figure 6-3 shows the functional block diagram of the PL3T.
6 PDH Boards
Figure 6-3 Functional block diagram of the PL3T

Backplane E3/T3 signal Interface unit E3/T3 CODEC unit Mapping/De mapping unit Service bus Cross-connect unit
E3/T3
Control bus Power supplied to the other units on the board Clock signal provided to the other units on the board
Logic control unit
+3.3 V
Clock unit
System clock signal

Table 6-10 Signal processing in the receive direction of the PL3T Step 1 2 Function Unit Interface unit CODEC unit Processing Flow Couples external E3/T3 signals by using a transformer and then transmits the signals to the board. l Equalizes the received signals. l Restores clock signals. l Detects T_ALOS alarms. l Performs HDB3 decoding. 3 Mapping/ Demapping unit l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3. l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be VC-3. l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3. l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3. l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one C-4. l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the VC-4 is formed. 4 Logic control unit l Processes clock signals. l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals to the active and standby cross-connect units.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
185
6 PDH Boards

Table 6-11 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the PL3T Step 1 Function Unit Logic control unit Processing Flow l Processes clock signals. l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals from the cross-connect unit. 2 Mapping/ Demapping unit l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3. l Demultiplexes one VC-3 from one TU-3. l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects specific alarms and performance events. l Extracts E3/T3 signals. 3 4 CODEC unit Interface unit Performs HDB3 coding. Couples E3/T3 signals by using a transformer and then transmits the signals to an external cable.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU unit over the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and communication unit.
Clock Unit
6.2.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 6-4 shows the front panel of the PL3T. Figure 6-4 Front panel of the PL3T
PL3T
STAT SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
PL3T
186
6 PDH Boards
Indicators
The front panel of the PL3T has the STAT and SRV indicators. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The front panel of the PL3T has three electrical ports. Table 6-12 lists the types of the ports on the PL3T and their respective usage. Table 6-12 Ports on the PL3T Port TX1TX3 Description Transmits the first to third E3/T3 signals. Connector Type SMB Pin Assignment l Inner core: transmitting data (+) l Outer core: transmitting data (-) RX1RX3 Receives the first to third E3/T3 signals. l Inner core: transmitting data (+) l Outer core: transmitting data (-) Required Cable 16.9 E3/T3 Cable

The PL3T does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
6.2.6 Valid Slots

The PL3T can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the PL3T on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
6.2.7 Feature Code

PL3T boards do not have feature codes.

This section describes the board specifications, including the electrical port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 6-13 lists the technical specifications of the PL3T.
6 PDH Boards
Table 6-13 Technical specifications of the PL3T Item Service ports TX1TX3 RX1RX3 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Transmits the first to third E3/T3 signals. Receives the first to third E3/T3 signals. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.30 kg 4.5 W Performance See Table 6-14.
Table 6-14 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's E3/T3 electrical ports Item Bit rate Code pattern Connector Port impedance (ohm) Signal bit rate at the output port Permitted frequency deviation at the input port Allowed attenuation at the input port Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823. Complies with ITU-T G. 824. Value 34368 kbit/s HDB3 SMB 75 Complies with ITU-T G.703. 44736 kbit/s B3ZS SMB 75
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
188
7 EoS Boards
7
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 550 supports EoS boards EFS8 and EGT1. 7.1 EFS8 The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board. 7.2 EGT1 The EGT1 is a 1xGE transparent transmission board.
EoS Boards
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
189
7 EoS Boards
7.1 EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.

The functional version of the EFS8 is TNH2.

The EFS8 supports the Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services, link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS), and test frames. Table 7-1 lists the functions and features that the EFS8 supports. Table 7-1 Functions and features that the EFS8 supports Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Service frame format Board Processes 8xFE signals. Supports 10/100BASE-T(X) that complies with IEEE 802.3u. l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p frames. l Supports a frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes, and supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. 4xVC-4
Maximum upstream bandwidth VCTRUNK
l Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 8 l Configuration principles are as follows: 1. A VCTRUNK can be bound with VC-12 paths or VC-3 paths. An NE can be configured with a maximum of 3xVC-3+63xVC-12 or 12xVC-3. 2. When VC-12 paths are to be bound, VCTRUNKs 1-8 can be bound only with VC4-4. 3. When VC-3 paths are to be bound, VCTRUNKs 1-8 can be bound with VC4-1 to VC4-4.
Encapsulation formats Mapping granularities Ethernet private line (EPL)

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
HDLC, LAPS, GFP-F VC-12, VC-3, VC12-Xv (x 63), VC3-Xv (x 12) Supports transparent transmission based on ports.
190
7 EoS Boards
Function and Feature Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)
Board l Supports EVPL services based on port+VLAN. l Supports EVPL services carried by QinQ links. l Uses the frame encapsulation formats in compliance with IEEE 802.1q and IEEE 802.1ad. l Supports Layer 2 convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence. l Supports the forwarding function in Layer 2 switching, and also supports the switching on both the user side and the SDH network side. l Supports the self-learning of source MAC addresses. The size of a MAC address table is 16 KB. You can set and query the aging time of an MAC address entry. l Supports a maximum of 512 static MAC addresses and configuration of static MAC routes. l Supports creation, deletion, and query of VBs. Only one VB is supported. The VB supports a maximum of 16 logical ports.
Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN)
Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) MTU
l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN. l Supports EVPLAN services that are based on IEEE 802.1q bridges and IEEE 802.1ad bridges. The MTU can be set to a value within the range of 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the MTU setting takes effect, the maximum length of a packet is restricted on an ingress IP port. Transparently transmits VLAN tags. Supported l Ethernet service OAM: supports continuity check (CC), loopback (LB), and link trace (LT) tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag, and supports OAM ping in compliance with the Huawei proprietary protocol. l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link performance monitoring, fault checks, and remote loopbacks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah, and supports loop checks in compliance with the Huawei proprietary protocol. Supported Supports port-based IEEE 802.3x flow control. In compliance with ITU-T G.7042, LCAS dynamically increases or decreases bandwidths and protects bandwidths. Transmits and receives Ethernet test frames. Supported
VLAN Multicast Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (ETH OAM)
QoS Flow control function LCAS Ethernet test frames Port mirroring
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
191
7 EoS Boards
Function and Feature Loopback types LAG LPT STP/RSTP Ethernet performance monitoring (RMON) Alarms and performance events Board temperature detection
Board Supports inloops at the MAC layer and PHY layer and inloops on VC-3 paths. Supported Supports point-to-point LPT and point-to-multipoint LPT. Supported Supports port-level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance. Supported

The EFS8 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit. This section describes how the EFS8 processes one FE signal, and it serves as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFS8. Figure 7-1 shows the function block diagram of the EFS8. Figure 7-1 Function block diagram of the EFS8
Backplane
Encapsulation/ Mapping unit
Ethernet access unit
FE
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
FE
Logic control unit -48 V/-60 V
Power supply unit
Fuse
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
192
7 EoS Boards

Table 7-2 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFS8 Step 1 Function Unit Ethernet access unit Processing Flow l Receives/Transmits FE signals. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for FE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals. 2 Encapsulation/ Mapping unit l Encapsulates and maps signals. l Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect unit over the service bus.

Table 7-3 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFS8 Step 1 Function Unit Encapsulation/ Mapping unit Ethernet access unit Processing Flow l Receives signals from the cross-connect unit. l Demaps and decapsulates signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames. l Sends out the generated FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses, alarms, and performance events reported by units on the board to the system control and communication unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
193
7 EoS Boards
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
7.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the EFS8. Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EFS8
EFS8
STAT PROG SRV
Indicators
The front panel of the EFS8 has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, and SRV. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 7-4 Description of the ports Port 1-4 Descriptio n Receives and transmits the first to fourth FE signals. Connector Type RJ45 Pin Assignment The ports support MDI and MDI-X modes. For details about the pin assignments for the ports, see Table 7-6 and Table 7-7. Required Cable 16.10 Network Cable
87654321
EFS8
7 EoS Boards
Port 5-8
Descriptio n Receives and transmits the fifth to eighth FE signals.
Connector Type
Pin Assignment
Required Cable
Table 7-6 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ Function Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
195
7 EoS Boards
Pin
10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire D (-)
Reserved
Table 7-7 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)

The EFS8 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.1.6 Valid Slots

The EFS8 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
7.1.7 Feature Code

EFS8 boards do not have feature codes.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
196
7 EoS Boards

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for electrical ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 7-8 lists the technical specifications of the EFS8. Table 7-8 Technical specifications of the EFS8 Item Service ports Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption FE electrical port Performance See Table 7-9.
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.65 kg 13.0 W
Table 7-9 Specifications of the EFS8 Ethernet electrical ports Service Port FE electrical port Port Rate 10BASE-T 100BASE-TX Code Pattern Manchester coding signals MLT-3 encoding signal Port Type RJ45
7.2 EGT1
The EGT1 is a 1xGE transparent transmission board.

The functional version of the EGT1 is TNH2.

The EGT1 supports the transparent transmission of Ethernet services, link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS), and test frames. Table 7-10 lists the functions and features that the EGT1 supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
197
7 EoS Boards
Table 7-10 Functions and features that the EGT1 supports Function and Feature Basic functions Port specifications Board Transparently transmits 1xGE signals. l Provides one 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-VX/ 1000BASE-ZX Ethernet optical port that supports auto-negotiation and complies with IEEE 802.3z; uses hot-swappable SFP optical modules. l Supports the 1000BASE-T RJ-45 Ethernet electrical interface. The electrical interface supports the 1000M full-duplex working mode; uses hot-swappable SFP electrical modules. l The GE optical port supports single-fiber bidirectional optical modules. Service frame format l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p frames. l Supports a frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes, and supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes. 8xVC-4
Maximum upstream bandwidth VCTRUNK
l Number of supported VCTRUNKs: 1 l Configuration principles are as follows: 1. A VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of 63 VC-12 paths, 24 VC-3 paths, or eight VC-4 paths. 2. When VC-12 paths are to be bound, a VCTRUNK can be bound only with VC4-4. 3. When VC-3 paths are to be bound, a VCTRUNK can be bound with VC4-1 to VC4-8.
Encapsulation formats Mapping granularities Ethernet private line (EPL) MTU
HDLC, LAPS, GFP-F VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC12-Xv (X 63), VC3-Xv (X 24), VC4-Xv (X 8) Supports port-based transparent transmission. The MTU can be set to a value within the range of 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes. After the MTU setting takes effect, the maximum length of a packet is restricted on an ingress IP port. Transparently transmits VLAN tags. Supports point-to-point LPT. Not supported
VLAN LPT Multicast
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
198
7 EoS Boards
Function and Feature Ethernet operation, administration and maintenance (ETH OAM) QoS Flow control function LCAS Ethernet test frames Ethernet performance monitoring (RMON) Alarms and performance events Board temperature detection
Board Supports continuity check (CC), loopback (LB), and link trace (LT) tests in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Not supported Supports port-based IEEE 802.3x flow control. In compliance with ITU-T G.7042, LCAS dynamically increases or decreases bandwidths and protects bandwidths. Transmits and receives Ethernet test frames. Supports port-level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating equipment management and maintenance. Supported

The EGT1 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit. Figure 7-3 shows the function block diagram of the EGT1. Figure 7-3 Function block diagram of the EGT1
Backplane
Encapsulation/ Mapping unit
Ethernet access unit
GE
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
GE
Logic control unit -48 V/-60 V
Power supply unit
Fuse
System clock signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
199
7 EoS Boards

Table 7-11 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EGT1 Step 1 Function Unit Ethernet access unit Processing Flow l Receives/Transmits GE signals and performs O/E conversion. l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for GE signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC checks, and Ethernet performance measurement for frame signals. 2 Encapsulation/ Mapping unit l Encapsulates and maps signals. l Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect unit over the service bus.

Table 7-12 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EGT1 Step 1 Function Unit Encapsulation/ Mapping unit Ethernet access unit Processing Flow l Receives signals from the cross-connect unit. l Demaps and decapsulates signals. l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance measurement. l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for Ethernet data frames. l Sends out the generated GE signals through Ethernet ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit over the control bus on the board. The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and communication unit to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses, alarms, and performance events reported by units on the board to the system control and communication unit.
7 EoS Boards
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
7.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators and an optical port on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGT1
EGT1
STAT SRV LINK ACT OPM
TX1/RX1
Indicators
The front panel of the EGT1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT, and OPM. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 7-13 Description of the port Port TX1/ RX1 Description Receives and transmits GE signals. Connector Type LC SFP optical module
TX RX
Pin Assignment
Required Cable
16.1 Fiber l TX represents the transmit port. Jumper l RX represents the receive port.
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F. The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
EGT1
7 EoS Boards

The EGT1 does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
7.2.6 Valid Slots

The EGT1 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
7.2.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and indicates the type of optical port. EGT1 boards have feature codes. Table 7-14 Feature code of the EGT1 Feature Code 01 03 Type of Optical Port 1000BASE-LX, operating at 1310 nm 1000BASE-LX, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the receive wavelength is 1490 nm.) 1000BASE-LX, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (The transmit wavelength is 1490 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310 nm.)
04

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for optical ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 7-15 lists the technical specifications of the EGT1. Table 7-15 Technical specifications of the EGT1 Item Service ports GE1, GE2 GE electrical port GE optical port Performance See Table 7-16 and Table 7-20. See Table 7-17, Table 7-18, and Table 7-19.
19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.60 kg 8.3 W
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
202
7 EoS Boards
Table 7-16 Specifications of the EGT1 Ethernet electrical ports Service Port GE electrical port Port Rate 1000BASE-T Code Pattern 4D-PAM5 coding signals Port Type RJ45
Table 7-17 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Optical port type Optical fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Value 1000BASE-SX Multi-mode LC 0.5 770 to 860 1000BASE-LX Single-mode LC 10 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-VX Single-mode LC 40 1270 to 1355 1000BASE-ZX Single-mode LC 80 1500 to 1580
-9.5 to -2.5
-9 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +5
-17
-20
-23
-23
-3
-3
-3
Table 7-18 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports Paramete r Type of optical interface Value 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-VX
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
203
7 EoS Boards
Paramete r Transmiss ion distance (km) Type of fiber Operating transmit wavelengt h (nm) Operating receive wavelengt h (nm) Launched optical power range (dBm) Receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
Value 10 40
1310
1490
1310
1490
-9 to -3
-2 to 3
-19.5
-23
-3
-3
Table 7-19 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE optical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00
9.00 11.80 17.30 25.00
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
204
7 EoS Boards
Item Frame Length (Bytes) 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00
Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00 309405.00 64970.00
29.20 31.30 33.40 37.40 98.00
Table 7-20 Ethernet performance specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's GE electrical ports Item Frame Length (Bytes) 64.00 128.00 256.00 512.00 1024.00 1280.00 1518.00 2000.00 9600.00 Performance Throughput (pks/sec) 1488095.00 844595.00 452899.00 234962.00 119732.00 96154.00 81274.00 61881.00 12994.00 Latency (us) Packet Loss Ratio (%) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Back-to-Back (Frames) 7440475.00 4222975.00 2264495.00 1174810.00 598660.00 480770.00 406370.00 309405.00 64970.00
7.00 7.40 8.40 10.60 14.70 17.00 18.90 22.60 83.40
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
205
8 WDM Board
8
About This Chapter
WDM Board
The OpitX OSN 550 can house the DMD2 board (WDM board). 8.1 DMD2 DMD2 is a bidirectional double channel optical add/drop multiplexing board.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
206
8 WDM Board
8.1 DMD2
DMD2 is a bidirectional double channel optical add/drop multiplexing board.

The functional version of the DMD2 is TNM1.

The main functions and features supported by the DMD2 are adding/dropping and multiplexing. For detailed functions and features, see Table 8-1. Table 8-1 Functions and features of the DMD2 board Functions and Features Basic Function WDM specifications Description Adds/Drops in two directions two channels of wavelength signals to/ from the multiplexed signals respectively. Supports both the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
NOTE
DMD2 boards use passive optical components so their voltages do not affect services.

The DMD2 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, the communication module. Figure 8-1 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD2. Figure 8-1 Principle block diagram of the DMD2
wD1 wD2 wA1 wA2 eA1 eA2 eD1 eD2
wIN
Drop OADM module
Add
Add OADM module
Drop
eIN
wOUT
eOUT
Communication module
SCC
Backplane or CTL
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
207
8 WDM Board
Signal Flow
In the east, the DMD2 board receives multiplexed signals through optical port eIN. After the optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board splits out two channels of optical signals from the multiplexed signals and outputs them through optical port eD1 and eD2. The board also receives through optical port eA1 and eA2 two channels of optical signals and couples them to the multiplexed signals and outputs the coupled signals through eOUT. The working principle of west signals is the same as that of east signals; while the signal flows in the two directions are different.
Module Function
l l Optical module Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths respectively in two directions. Communication module Communicates with the SCC unit, to control and operate on each module of the unit.
8.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the DMD2
DMD2
wIN wOUT wA1 wD1 wA2 wD2 1471 1491
eIN eOUT eA1 eD1 eA2 eD2 1471 1491
NOTE
The number under the optical port indicates one of the wavelengths that are supported by the optical port.
Indicators
The DMD2 board does not have indicators.
Ports
Table 8-2 Types and descriptions of the DMD2 ports Port Description Connector Type LC Requir ed Cable 16.1 Fiber Jumper
208
wIN/ wOUT
Receive or transmit the westward multiplexed signal.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
8 WDM Board
Port
Description
Connector Type
Requir ed Cable
wA1/ wA2 wD1/ wD2 eIN/ eOUT eA1/ eA2 eD1/ eD2
Receive the westward optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one westward channel respectively. Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping one westward channel respectively. Receive or transmit the eastward multiplexed signal. Receive the eastward optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one eastward channel respectively. Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping one eastward channel respectively.

None.
8.1.6 Valid Slots

The DMD2 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
8.1.7 Feature Code

None.

Specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications and power consumption. Table 8-3 lists the technical specifications of the DMD2. Table 8-3 Technical specifications of the DMD2 Item Service ports Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Value See Table 8-4 and Table 8-5. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.72 kg
8 WDM Board
Item Power consumption
Value 0.5 W
Table 8-4 Optical port specifications for the DMD2 board in the dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) system Optical port eIN-eD1 eIN-eD2 wIN-wD1 wIN-wD2 Item Operating frequency range (THz) Adjacent channel spacing (GHz) 1.0 dB spectral width (nm) Insertion loss on the drop channel (dB) Adjacent channel isolation (dB) Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB) eA1-eOUT eA2-eOUT wA1-wOUT wA2-wOUT wIN-eOUT eIN-wOUT Reflectance (dB) < -40 1.0 dB spectral width (nm) Insertion loss on the add channel (dB) Insertion loss (dB) Value 192.10 to 196.00 100 0.2 < 1.5 > 30 > 40 0.2 < 1.5 < 2.2
Table 8-5 Optical port specifications for the DMD2 board in the coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) system Optical port eIN-eD1 eIN-eD2 wIN-wD1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Item Operating wavelength range (nm) Adjacent channel spacing (nm) 1.0 dB spectral width (nm)
Value 1471 to 1611 20 13.0
210
8 WDM Board
Optical port wIN-wD2
Item Insertion loss on the drop channel (dB) Adjacent channel isolation (dB) Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB)
Value < 1.5 > 30 > 40 13.0 < 1.5 < 2.2
eA1-eOUT eA2-eOUT wA1-wOUT wA2-wOUT wIN-eOUT eIN-wOUT -
1.0 dB spectral width (nm) Insertion loss on the add channel (dB) Insertion loss (dB)
Reflectance (dB)
< -40
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
211
9 Auxiliary Boards
9
About This Chapter
Auxiliary Boards
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the auxiliary boards AUX and FAN. 9.1 AUX The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and alarm input/output ports. 9.2 FAN The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat for the chassis by means of air cooling.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
212
9 Auxiliary Boards
9.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and alarm input/output ports.

The functional version of the AUX is TNM1.

The AUX provides one orderwire phone port, one external clock port, one 64 kbit/s synchronous data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and one outdoor cabinet monitoring port. Table 9-1 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports. Table 9-1 Functions and features that the AUX supports Function and Feature Synchronous/Asynchronous transparent data port External clock port External time port Alarm input/output ports Outdoor cabinet monitoring port Board Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port. Provides one 120-ohm, two-channel clock input/output port for connecting to BITS. Provides two external time input/output ports. Provides alarm ports with six inputs and two outputs. Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring port (sharing one port physically with an alarm input/output port) for monitoring the temperature and humidity of an outdoor cabinet. Provides one orderwire phone port so that operation/maintenance engineers at different workstations can have voice communication with each other.
Orderwire phone port

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the AUX.
9 Auxiliary Boards

Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Backplane
Synchronous/Asynchronous transparent data port Orderwire phone port 6-input/2-output alarm ports Two-channel external clock/time port Outdoor cabinet monitoring port Orderwire unit
Power supply unit Power dip detection signal System bus
+3.3 V
Logic control unit
Clock unit
Clock Board status signal detection unit
Power Supply Unit

l l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units on the AUX. Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l l l l l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port. Provides one orderwire phone port. Provides 6-input/2-output alarm ports. Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring port. Provides one two-channel external clock/time port.
Logic Control Unit

l l l l l l l l l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to control the board. Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes. Processes clock signals. Provides board status information. Checks the status of the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards. Checks the status of the active and standby clocks. Switches system clock reference sources automatically or by running specific commands. Detects and reports the status of the key clock for each board in the system. Detects the presence of the key clock for each board in the system and reports specific alarms if any key clock is found lost.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
9 Auxiliary Boards
Board Status Detection Unit

l l l Detects board performance data such as board temperature and voltage. Controls power shut-down. Stores and reads board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
l Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
9.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

AUX
STAT SRV
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI ALMI2/EXT SYNC TOD0 TOD1
Indicators
The front panel of the AUX has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
Table 9-2 Description of the ports on the AUX Por t F1/ S1 Descript ion 64 kbit/s synchrono us transparen t data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchron ous transparen t data port Connector Type RJ45 Pin Assignment l Pin 1: transmitting asynchronous data signals l Pin 2: grounding end l Pin 3: receiving asynchronous data signals l Pin 4: transmitting synchronous data signals (+) l Pin 5: transmitting synchronous data signals (-) l Pin 6: grounding end l Pin 7: receiving synchronous data signals (+) l Pin 8: receiving synchronous data signals (-) Required Cable 16.10 Network Cable
87 65 4 32 1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
215
9 Auxiliary Boards
Por t PH ON E
Descript ion Orderwire phone port
Connector Type
Pin Assignment l Pin 1: not defined l Pin 2: not defined l Pin 3: not defined l Pin 4: orderwire call signal (ring) l Pin 5: orderwire call signal (tip) l Pin 6: not defined l Pin 7: not defined l Pin 8: not defined
Required Cable
AL MO
Alarm output port
l Pin 1: the first external alarm output signal (+) l Pin 2: the first external alarm output signal (-) l Pin 3: the second external alarm output signal (+) l Pin 4: the first external alarm output signal (+) l Pin 5: the first external alarm output signal (-) l Pin 6: the second external alarm output signal (-) l Pin 7: the second external alarm output signal (+) l Pin 8: the second external alarm output signal (-)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
216
9 Auxiliary Boards
Por t AL MI1
Descript ion Alarm input port 1 (four inputs)
Connector Type
Pin Assignment l Pin 1: the first external alarm input signal l Pin 2: grounding end for the first alarm input signal l Pin 3: the second external alarm input signal l Pin 4: the third external alarm input signal l Pin 5: grounding end for the second alarm input signal l Pin 6: grounding end for the third alarm input signal l Pin 7: the fourth external alarm input signal l Pin 8: grounding end for the fourth alarm input signal
Required Cable
AL MI2 / EX T
Alarm input port 2 (two inputs)/ Outdoor cabinet monitorin g port
l Pin 1: the fifth external alarm input signal l Pin 2: grounding end for the fifth alarm input signal l Pin 3: receiving outdoor cabinet monitoring signal (-) l Pin 4: the sixth external alarm input signal l Pin 5: grounding end for the sixth alarm input signal l Pin 6: receiving outdoor cabinet monitoring signal (+) l Pin 7: transmitting outdoor cabinet monitoring signal (-) l Pin 8: transmitting outdoor cabinet monitoring signal (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
217
9 Auxiliary Boards
Por t SY NC
Descript ion 120-ohm, twochannel external clock input/ output port
Connector Type
Pin Assignment l Pin 1: differential signal input of external clock 1 (-) l Pin 2: differential signal input of external clock 1 (+) l Pin 3: differential signal input of external clock 2 (+) l Pin 4: differential signal output of external clock 1 (-) l Pin 5: differential signal output of external clock 1 (+) l Pin 6: differential signal input of external clock 2 (-) l Pin 7: differential signal output of external clock 2 (+) l Pin 8: differential signal output of external clock 2 (-)
Required Cable
TO D0
External time port 1
l Pin 1: not defined l Pin 2: not defined l Pin 3: 1pps differential input/ output signal (-) l Pin 4: GND l Pin 5: GND l Pin 6: 1pps differential input/ output signal (+) l Pin 7: TOD differential input/ output signal (-) l Pin 8: TOD differential input/ output signal (+)
TO D1
External time port 2
l Pin 1: not defined l Pin 2: not defined l Pin 3: 1pps differential input/ output signal (-) l Pin 4: GND l Pin 5: GND l Pin 6: 1pps differential input/ output signal (+) l Pin 7: TOD differential input/ output signal (-) l Pin 8: TOD differential input/ output signal (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
218
9 Auxiliary Boards

None.
9.1.6 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
9.1.7 Feature Code

None.

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 9-4 lists the technical specifications of the AUX. Table 9-4 Technical specifications of the AUX Item Ports F1/S1 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port Orderwire phone port Alarm output port Alarm input port 1 (four inputs) Performance See Table 9-5 and Table 9-6.
PHONE ALMO ALMI1

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
See Table 9-7. Not involved Not involved

219
9 Auxiliary Boards
Item ALMI2/ EXT SYNC TOD0 TOD1 Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Alarm input port 2 (two inputs)/ Outdoor cabinet monitoring port 120-ohm, two-channel external clock input/output port External time port 1 External time port 2
Performance For the outdoor cabinet monitoring port, seeTable 9-8. See Table 9-9. See Table 9-10. See Table 9-10. 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 225.80 mm 0.30 kg 2.2 W
Table 9-5 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's synchronous data ports Item Transmission channel Bit rate (kbit/s) Port type Port characteristics Value Byte F1 in the SDH overhead 64 Codirectional In compliance with ITU-T G.703
Table 9-6 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's asynchronous data ports Item Transmission channel Bit rate (kbit/s) Port characteristics Value User-defined byte in the SDH overhead 19.2 In compliance with RS-232
Table 9-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's orderwire ports Item Transmission channel Orderwire type Pair in each direction Value Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead Addressing call One symmetrical pair
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
220
9 Auxiliary Boards
Item Impedance (ohm)
Value 600
Table 9-8 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's outdoor cabinet monitoring ports Item Port characteristics Value In compliance with RS-485
Table 9-9 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external clock ports Item External synchronous source Frequency accuracy Pull-in or pull-out range Noise generation Noise toleration Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance Synchronization clock transfer accuracy < 50 ppb Value 2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) In compliance with ITU-T G.813
Table 9-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN 550's external time ports Item Port type Value l 1PPS+TOD l DCLS Electrical specifications Protocol type RS-422 l 1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA l DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)
9.2 FAN
The FAN is a fan board that dissipates heat for the chassis by means of air cooling.
9 Auxiliary Boards

The functional version of the FAN is TNM1.

The FAN adjusts the fan rotating speed, and detects and reports the fan status. Table 9-11 lists the functions and features that the FAN supports. Table 9-11 Functions and features that the FAN supports Function and Feature Power input Board Receives two +12 V power supplies from the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards. The two +12 V power supplies provide 1+1 backup for each other. 6 l Adjusts the rotating speed automatically. l If one fan reports an alarm, the other fans are adjusted to run at full speed. Provides soft-start for the power supply of the fans and protects fans against overcurrent. l Reports the information about the fan rotating speed, alarms, version number, and board in-position status. l Reports specific alarms when a fan fails or is aged. l Detects the power supply status of a fan, and reports specific alarms when the power supplied to a fan fails. l Reports specific alarms when the FAN board is offline and stops detecting fan status if the FAN board is offline. l Supports hot board swapping.
Number of fans Intelligent fan speed adjustment
Protection OM features

The FAN consists of a fan unit, a power unit, and a communication monitoring unit.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
222
9 Auxiliary Boards

Figure 9-2 Functional block diagram of the FAN
Backplane
Fan unit
+12 V
+12 V Power unit +12 V
Communication detection signal Communication detection signal
Communication monitoring unit
Power Unit
l l Receives +12 V power from the backplane. Provides the fan power with soft-start and overcurrent protection functions.
Fan Unit
Six air-cooling fans dissipate the heat generated by the system.
Communication Monitoring Unit

l l Detects the manufacturing information, PCB version information, and ambient temperature of the FAN, and reports the information to the system control and communication unit. Detects the fan rotating speed and adjusts the speed according to the pulse-width modulation signal from the system control and communication unit.
9.2.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 9-3 shows the front panel of the FAN.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
223
9 Auxiliary Boards
Figure 9-3 Front panel of the FAN
OptiX OSN 550

FAN
CRIT
MAJ
MIN
Indicators
The front panel of the FAN has the following indicators: FAN, CRIT, MAJ, and MIN. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
NOTE
The CRIT, MAJ, or MIN indicator on the front panel of the FAN indicates the current alarm severity of the subrack.
ESD Wrist Strap Jack

An ESD wrist strap needs to be connected to the ESD wrist strap jack to achieve the proper grounding of the human body.
Labels
The front panel of the FAN has the following labels: l l ESD protection label: indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive. Fan warning label: warns you not to touch fan leaves before the fan stops.
9.2.5 Valid Slots

The FAN can be inserted in slot 93 in the chassis. The logical slot of the FAN on the NMS is the same as its physical slot.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
224
9 Auxiliary Boards

This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, and power consumption. Table 9-12 lists the technical specifications of the FAN. Table 9-12 Technical specifications of the FAN Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Performance 86.2 mm x 28.5 mm x 217.6 mm 0.30 kg 12.0 W
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
225
10 Power Boards
10
About This Chapter
Power Boards
The OptiX OSN 550 supports the power boards PIU and APIU. 10.1 UPM The uninterruptible power module (UPM) consists of a power box and storage batteries. It provides access to 110 V/220 V AC mains power supplies. 10.2 PIU The PIU is a power interface board. The OptiX OSN 550 supports two PIUs, each of which receives one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply. 10.3 APIU The APIU is an AC power interface board and supplies 100 V to 240 V AC power to the equipment.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
226
10 Power Boards
10.1 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM) consists of a power box and storage batteries. It provides access to 110 V/220 V AC mains power supplies.

None.
NOTE
The management module of the UPM is the CAU. On the U2000, you only need to configure the CAU.

The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/ 220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires batteries. The UPM power system consists of the GIE4805S power system (converting the 110 V/220 V power into the 48 V power) and storage batteries. The output power of a single GIE4805S power system is 340 W. The GIE4805S power system is 1U high. Figure 10-1 shows the appearance of the GIE4805S power system. Figure 10-1 Appearance of the GIE4805S power system
80 E4 GI
5S
Table 10-1 provide the functions and features of the UPM.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
227
10 Power Boards
Table 10-1 Functions and features of the GIE4805S power system Function and Feature Dual hot backup function GIE4805S
The power conversion part of the UPM adopts the hot backup design by using two AC/DC rectifier modules. The two rectifier modules can work simultaneously and share the load. If one rectifier module fails, the other rectifier module immediately bears all the load. In this case, the services running on the equipment are not affected, which improves the stability of the system. The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is improved. The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the equipment operates normally. If the storage battery uses the 38AH module, it can supply power for three to four hours. The UPM provides the monitoring module and the NM monitoring function. The monitoring module monitors and controls the rectifier module, AC power distribution, DC power distribution, and parameters and status of the battery group in real time. The monitoring module also reports the collected information to the transmission NMS in real time. The storage battery realizes float charging and current limiting. The loading capability of each rectifier module is 270 W.
Hotswappable function Storage battery protection function Monitoring function
Loading capacity

The UPM is fed by one 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input power into -48 V DC voltage to provide two DC branches and one battery branch The UPM consists of the rectifier module and the monitoring module. Figure 10-2 shows the block diagram of the UPM. Figure 10-2 UPM function block diagram
110 V/220 V AC Rectifier module
48 V DC
PIU
Monitoring module
System control unit
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
228
10 Power Boards
Rectifier Module
The rectifier module converts the 110 V/220 V AC mains power supply into -48 V DC voltage required by the transmission equipment.
Monitoring Module
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop, and load loop. In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment. As a result, the batteries are automatically protected. When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
10.1.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the UPM has indicators and interfaces of many types.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 10-3 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site). Figure 10-3 Front panel of the GIE4805S
4
BAT BAT BAT + 48V+ 48VLOAD1 LOAD2
! CAUTION
DO NOT INVERT POLARIT Y

5
AC100~240 ALM Vout ALM Vout RUN
6
ALM
RS232
1 1. AC input
2 2. Rectifier module/Air outlet 5. Load
3 3. Communication interface 6. Load
4. Battery interface
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
229
10 Power Boards
Indicators
The front panel of the rectifier module on the left of the UPM has the following indicators: l l Fault indicator (ALM) one color (red) Output state indicator (Vout) one color (green)
The front panel of the monitoring module on the top panel of the UPM has the following indicators: l l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red) Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
For the meanings of the status of the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The front panel of the GIE4805S has four interfaces. Table 10-2 describes the types and usage of the interfaces of the GIE4805S. Table 10-2 Interfaces of the GIE4805S power system Interface AC100240 Red on/off button RS-232 communicatio n interface Type of Interface Power interface Button Usage It is the AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V AC power. It is on the right side of the front panel of the rectifier module. You can enable or disable the rectifier module by pressing the button. The UPM communicates with the SCC through this interface so that the UPM can report alarms to the SCC and the SCC can control the UPM remotely. The RS-232 serial port of power system is connected to the NMS/COM interface of the OptiX OSN equipment to enable the NMS to monitor the battery group and the connected power system. Power output interface Power interface Three power output interfaces are on the rightmost side of the power system. The interface at the top is the battery interface, through which the power system is connected to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box through a battery cable. The other two interfaces are the load interfaces and can supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment by using power cables.
RS-232
Table 10-3 provides the pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port.
10 Power Boards
Table 10-3 Pin assignments of the RS-232 serial port Description Pin for receiving data Pin for transmitting data Pin for common grounding There is an alarm indicating that the rectifier module is faulty. The rectifier module is normal. There is an alarm indicating that the AC input fails. The AC input is normal. There is an undervoltage alarm on battery discharging. There is no alarm on battery discharging. Pin 2 3 5 89 89 87 87 86 86 Status Receives data. Transmits data. Grounding Short-circuited Open Short-circuited Open Short-circuited Open
10.1.5 Valid Slots

The UPM is case shaped. Hence, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack. The logical slot of the UPM on the NMS is slot 97.
NOTE
When two system control boards are configured for mutual backup, the UPM management port can be connected to only the NMS/COM port on the system control board in slot 7.

The technical specifications of the UPM include the power parameters and mechanical specifications. Table 10-4 lists the technical specifications of the UPM. Table 10-4 Technical specifications of the UPM Item Power parameters Dimensi ons (H x W x D) Power box Storage battery Value See Table 10-5. 44 mm x 438 mm x 240 mm 170 mm x 197 mm x 165 mm < 10 kg
Weight
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
231
10 Power Boards
Table 10-5 Power parameters for the GIE4805S Parameter Voltage range of the AC input AC input Rated input current Output nominal voltage Rated output current Number of backup battery groups Charging current of the backup battery Fuse of the backup battery Storage battery: DC undercurrent point Storage battery: final voltage point Storage battery: floating charge voltage Regulated voltage precision Non-balance of load sharing Value 90264 V AC One single-phase three-wire system: 47-63 Hz 3.5 A 54.00.5 V 8 A (two load outputs with each current not more than 5 A) One (38 Ah) 3A 10 A 460.5 V 43.50.5 V 54.00.5 V 1% 5% (50%100% load)
Rated efficiency of the integrated 80% equipment Peak-to-peak noise voltage DC voltage drop within the shield (20C) Electrical network adjustment rate 200 mV 500 mV 0.1%
10.2 PIU
The PIU is a power interface board. The OptiX OSN 550 supports two PIUs, each of which receives one -48 V/-60 V DC power supply.

The functional version of the PIU is TND1.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
232
10 Power Boards

The PIU supports power access, power protection, surge protection status monitoring, and information reporting. Table 10-6 lists the functions and features that the PIU supports. Table 10-6 Functions and features that the PIU supports Function and Feature Basic functions Power access Maximum power supply capability Maximum current Power output Protection Protection mode Power protection Surge protection Detection functions Board Two PIUs are provided and each receives one -48 V DC or -60 V DC power input. The maximum power supply capability of each input is 550 W. 15 A The PIU provides other boards with -48 V power. Two power input ports form 1+1 HSB. l Protection against overcurrent l Protection against short circuits Supported Input power detection Surge protection status detection Temperature detection Detection of input overvoltage, input undervoltage, and output overvoltage Maintenance features Hot board swapping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the PIU.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
233
10 Power Boards

Figure 10-4 Functional block diagram of the PIU
Backplane
-48 V/-60 V
Protection and detection unit
EMI filtering unit
-48 V
Board operating in distributed power supply mode
Detection signal Communication control unit
Detection signal
System control and communication unit +3.3 V
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the PIU. It performs the following functions: l l l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge. Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure alarm if there is any. Monitors PIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit controls the communication between the system control and communication unit and the PIU and reports the following information to the system control and communication unit: l l l l PIU manufacturing information PCB version information Surge-protection failure information PIU temperature
10.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power ports, and a label on the front panel.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
234
10 Power Boards
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 10-5 Front panel of the PIU
NEG(-) RTN(+)
Indicators
The front panel of the PIU has the following indicator: PWR. For status explanation for the indicator, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The PIU receives one power supply. Table 10-7 lists the types of the ports on the PIU and their respective usage. Table 10-7 Ports on the PIU Port NEG1(-) RTN1(+) Description -48 V power input port BGND power input port Connector Type 2 mm HM power connector, 2x2 pins Required Cable 16.2 DC Power Cable
Labels
Power caution label: instructs you to read related instructions before performing any powerrelated tasks.
CAUTION
Do not remove or install a PIU while the equipment is being powered on. That is, turn off all the power supplies to the PIU before removing or installing it.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
PWR
-48V
-60V
235
10 Power Boards
10.2.5 Valid Slots

The PIU can be inserted in slots 91 and 92. The logical slots of the PIU on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.

This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 10-8 lists the technical specifications of the PIU. Table 10-8 Technical specifications of the PIU Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Input voltage Performance 41.4 mm x 21.0 mm x 229.9 mm 0.12 kg 0.5 W -38.4 V to -72.0 V
10.3 APIU
The APIU is an AC power interface board and supplies 100 V to 240 V AC power to the equipment.

The functional version of APIU boards is TNF1.

The APIU supports access of 100 V to 240 V AC power and converts it into -53.5 V DC power. Table 10-9 lists the functions and features that the APIU supports. Table 10-9 Functions and features that the APIU supports Function and Feature Basic functions Power access Board One APIU enables access of two 100 V to 240 V AC power inputs. One APIU supports two power modules: AC1 and AC2. The two power modules are separately inserted in two boxes. Both power modules and their boxes are independently pluggable. 200 W
236
Supply power
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
10 Power Boards
Function and Feature Power output Protection Protection scheme Power protection
Board The APIU provides the other boards with -53.5 V power. 1+1 HSB l Protection against output overvoltage l Protection against output overcurrent l Protection against short circuits in output power l Protection against overtemperature
Surge protection Monitoring functions
Supported Input power monitoring Surge protection status monitoring Temperature monitoring Monitoring of input overvoltage, input undervoltage, and output overvoltage
Hot swapping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the APIU.

Figure 10-6 Functional block diagram of the APIU
Backplane
100~220V
Protection and detection unit
EMI filtering unit
-53.5 V
Board operating in distributed power supply mode
Detection signal Communication control unit
Detection signal
System control and communication unit +3.3 V
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
237
10 Power Boards
Protection and Detection Unit

The protection and detection unit primarily protects and detects the APIU. It performs the following functions: l l l Provides protection against lightning strike and surge. Detects whether the surge-protection circuit fails and reports a surge-protection failure alarm if there is any. Monitors APIU temperature in real time and reports it to the system control and communication unit through the communication control unit.
EMI Filtering Unit

The EMI filtering unit performs electro-magnetic interference (EMI) filtering.
Communication Control Unit

The communication control unit controls the communication between the system control and communication unit and the APIU and reports the following information to the system control and communication unit: l l l l APIU manufacturing information PCB version information Surge-protection failure information APIU temperature
10.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators, power ports, and switches on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 10-7 Front panel of the APIU
APIU ON APIU ON AC2
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT 100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A
AC1
OFF
OFF
100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A
Indicators
The front panel of the APIU has the INPUT and OUTPUT indicators. For status explanation for the indicators, see Indicator Status Explanation.
Ports
The APIU enables access of two power supplies. Table 10-10 lists the types of the ports on the APIU and their respective usage.
10 Power Boards
Table 10-10 Ports on the APIU Port ~100-240V; 50/60Hz;3.5A Description Enables access of 100 V to 240 V AC power. Connector Type Three-phase socket Required Cable 16.3 AC Power Cable
Switches
The front panel of the APIU has two ON/OFF switches and they control the two AC power ports.
10.3.5 Valid Slots

The APIU can be inserted in two slot pairs: slots 2 and 4 and slots 4 and 6. Slots 4 and 6 are recommended.

This section describes the board specifications, including dimensions, weight, power consumption, and input voltage. Table 10-11 lists the technical specifications of the APIU. Table 10-11 Technical specifications of the APIU Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Power consumption Input voltage Output voltage Performance 40.1 mm x 193.8 mm x 208.7 mm 1.93 kg 20.0 W 100 V to 240 V AC power -53.5 V DC power
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
239
11 Outdoor Cabinet
11
Appearance and Structure
Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating outdoors needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
Figure 11-1 shows the appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Figure 11-2 shows the structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Figure 11-1 Appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
240
11 Outdoor Cabinet
Figure 11-2 Structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet

3 2 1 4 5
1. Cable distribution box 2. PMU module 3. HPMI board 4. Fan board (for internal circulation) 5. CMUA board 6. PSU module 7. EPS subrack
Technical and Ambient Specifications

Table 11-1 lists the technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets. Table 11-1 Technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets Item Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Heat consumption Operating temperature Specification 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 mm 72 kg 700 W -40C to +50C. The solar radiant intensity is 1120 10% W/m2. Remarks If the ambient temperature is below -20C, a heater is required.
NOTE The ambient temperature in the operating environment where a heater is required refers to the average of the lowest temperature every day in the annually coldest month in the local place.
Relative humidity
5% RH to 100% RH
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
241
11 Outdoor Cabinet
Item Altitude
Specification -60 m to 4000 m
Remarks After the altitude reaches 3000 m, the highest operating temperature decreases by 1 C as the altitude increases by 100 m. -
Wind speed Storage temperature Dust resistance and water resistance Acoustic power
67 m/s -40C to +70C In compliance with IP55 rating protection In compliance with ETS 300 753 4.1E
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
242
12 Filler Panel
12
About This Chapter
Filler panels are used to cover vacant slots of a chassis.
Filler Panel
12.1 Functions A filler panel performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis, prevents foreign objects from entering a chassis, and ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis. 12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots This section describes the front panel of and slots valid for a filler panel. The OptiX OSN 550 supports three types of filler panels with different dimensions: filler panel for the PCX and extended boards, filler panel for the PIU, and filler panel for the APIU.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
243
12 Filler Panel
12.1 Functions
A filler panel performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis, prevents foreign objects from entering a chassis, and ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis. A filler panel provides the following functions: l l l l Performs electromagnetic shielding for a chassis. Prevents foreign objects from entering a chassis. Prevents the exposure of internal voltage. Ensures proper circulating of cooling air in a chassis.
12.2 Appearance and Valid Slots

This section describes the front panel of and slots valid for a filler panel. The OptiX OSN 550 supports three types of filler panels with different dimensions: filler panel for the PCX and extended boards, filler panel for the PIU, and filler panel for the APIU.
Appearance
Figure 12-1 Filler panel for the PCX and extended boards
Figure 12-2 Filler panel for the PIU
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
244
12 Filler Panel
Figure 12-3 Filler panel for the APIU
Valid Slots
Table 12-1 lists the slots valid for a filler panel. Table 12-1 Slots valid for a filler panel Type of Filler Panel Filler panel for the PCX and extended boards Filler panel for the PIU Filler panel for the APIU Valid Slot Slots 1-8 Slots 91 and 92 Slots 2 and 4, slots 4 and 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
245
13 Optical Attenuators
13
Fixed Optical Attenuators
Optical Attenuators
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical attenuators (VOAs).
A fixed optical attenuator can reduce optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. Fixed optical attenuators are commonly available in the following attenuation amounts: 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and 15 dB. Figure 13-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator. Figure 13-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator
Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuators

A mechanical VOA can adjust optical power on an optical path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment of a VOA ranges from 2 dB to 30 dB. Figure 13-2 shows the appearance of a common VOA.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
246
13 Optical Attenuators
Figure 13-2 Appearance of a VOA
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
247
14 Pluggable Optical Modules
14
About This Chapter
Pluggable Optical Modules
This chapter describes the pluggable optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. For a board on which pluggable optical modules are installed, if applicable service categories need to be changed or faulty optical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only the optical modules instead of the board. 14.1 Overview SFP/eSFP optical modules are SFP optical transceivers and are used for SDH optical communication and Ethernet data communication. XFP optical modules are 10-gigabit SFP optical transceivers and are used for 10GE data communication. 14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules This section lists the SFP/eSFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. 14.3 XFP Optical Modules This section lists the XFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. 14.4 CWDM/DWDM This topic describes the CWDM/DWDM optical modules of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
248
14.1 Overview
SFP/eSFP optical modules are SFP optical transceivers and are used for SDH optical communication and Ethernet data communication. XFP optical modules are 10-gigabit SFP optical transceivers and are used for 10GE data communication.
Appearance
Figure 14-1 shows the appearances of an SFP/eSFP optical module, and Figure 14-2 shows the appearance of an XFP optical module. Figure 14-1 SFP/eSFP optical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 56.5 mm Figure 14-2 XFP optical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 18.3 mm x 78 mm

Part Number
Part numbers identify different types of optical modules and are contained in labels. Labels are attached to pluggable optical modules, as shown in the following figure. Figure 14-3 shows a label for a pluggable optical module. Figure 14-3 Label for a pluggable optical module
NOTE
You can obtain the specifications of an optical module by querying its part number in this document.
14.2 SFP/eSFP Optical/Electrical Modules

This section lists the SFP/eSFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Two-Fiber Bidirectional SFP/eSFP Optical Modules

Table 14-1 Two-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules Part Number 34060286 Name 2.125 Gbit/s eSFP optical module Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm, 2.125 Gbit/s (multirate), -9.5 dBm, -2.5 dBm, -17 dBm, LC, MM, 0.5 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
Applicable Board EM6F/PCXLG/ PCXGA/PCXGB/ EG4C/EGT1
34060473
1.25 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
EM6F/PCXLG/ PCXGA/PCXGB/ EG4C/EGT1
34060298
34060360
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
250
Part Number 34060290
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9.5 dBm, -3 dBm, -20 dBm, LC (-40 to +85), SM, 10 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -22 dBm, LC (-40 to +85), SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 5 dBm, -24 dBm, LC (-40 to +85), SM, 80 km
Applicable Board EM6F/PCXGA/ PCXGB/EG4C
34060333
34060324
34060287
155 Mbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, MM, 2 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP (industry), 1310 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -31 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C
34060276
EM6F/PCXLX/ PCXLG/EF8F/ EG4C/SL1D/SL1Q/ CXL/CQ1 EM6F/PCXLX/ PCXLG/EF8F/ EG4C/SL1D/SL1Q/ CXL/CQ1 EM6F/PCXLX/ PCXLG/EF8F/ EG4C/SL1D/SL1Q/ CXL/CQ1 EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/ CQ1
34060281
34060282
34060307
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
251
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP (industry), 1310 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP (industry), 1550 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -37 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
Applicable Board EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/ CQ1
34060309
EM6F/EF8F/EG4C/ CQ1
34060277
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-4, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-4, -3 dBm, 2 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM-4, -3 dBm, 2 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/ CXL/SL4D
34060280
34060284
34060485
2.5 Gbit/s eSFP optical module
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, 155 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -21 dBm, LC, SM, 15 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm, STM-16, -2 dBm, 3 dBm, -29 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm, STM-16, -2 dBm, 3 dBm, -30 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
PCXLX/PCXLG/ CXL
34060289
PCXLX/PCXLG/ CXL
34060488
PCXLX/PCXLG/ CXL
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
252
Single-Fiber Bidirectional SFP/eSFP Optical Modules

Table 14-2 Single-fiber bidirectional SFP/eSFP optical modules Part Number 34060470 Name 1.25 Gbit/s singlefiber bidirectional eSFP optical module Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/ Rx 1490 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1490 nm/ Rx 1310 nm, 1.25 Gbit/s, -9 dBm, -3 dBm, -19.5 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km Applicable Board This module can function as a GE optical port or an STM-4 optical port. This module can function as a GE optical port when installed on the EM6F/PCXLG/ PCXGA/PCXGB/ EGT1/EG4C board. This module can function as an STM-4 optical port when installed on the PCXLG/PCXLX/ CXL/SL4D board. This module can function as a GE optical port or an STM-4 optical port. This module can function as a GE optical port when installed on the EM6F/PCXLG/ PCXGA/PCXGB/ EGT1/EG4C board. This module can function as an STM-4 optical port when installed on the PCXLG/PCXLX/ CXL/SL4D board. This module can function as an FE optical port or an STM-1 optical port. This module can function as an FE optical port when installed on the EM6F/EF8F/EG4C board.
253
34060475
34060539
Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm (Tx)/ 1490 nm (Rx), 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 3 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1490 nm (Tx)/ 1310 nm (Rx), 1.25 Gbit/s, -2 dBm, 3 dBm, -23 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km
34060540
34060363
Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/ Rx 1550 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 km
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/ Rx 1310 nm, STM-1, -15 dBm, -8 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 15 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1310 nm/ Rx 1550 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, Tx 1550 nm/ Rx 1310 nm, STM-1, -5 dBm, 0 dBm, -32 dBm, LC/PC, SM, 40 km
Applicable Board This module can function as an STM-1 optical port when installed on the PCXLG/PCXLX/ CXL/SL1D/SL1Q/ CQ1 board. This module can function as an FE optical port or an STM-1 optical port. This module can function as an FE optical port when installed on the EM6F/EF8F/EG4C board. This module can function as an STM-1 optical port when installed on the PCXLG/PCXLX/ CXL/SL1D/SL1Q/ CQ1 board.
34060328
34060329
NOTE
l Optical module specifications are explained as follows: name, encapsulation form, operating wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver sensitivity, optical port type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance. l Optical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei offices for the latest optical module specifications.
14.3 XFP Optical Modules

This section lists the XFP optical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
254
XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 Supports

Table 14-3 XFP Optical Modules That the OptiX OSN 550 Supports Part Number 34060362 Name 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 Gbit/s XFP optical module Specification Optical transceiver, XFP, 850 nm, 10.3 Gbit/s, -7.3 dBm, -1.3 dBm, -7.5 dBm, LC, MM, 0.3 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1310 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 Gbit/ s, -6 dBm, -1 dBm, -14.4 dBm, LC, SM, 10 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, -1 dBm, 2 dBm, -15 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, -24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Applicable Board PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060313
9.95 Gbit/s to 10.71 Gbit/s XFP optical module
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060322
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060361
PCXLX/PCXX/EX1
34060577
Optical transceiver, PCXX/EX1 XFP(industry), 1550 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, +2 dBm, -1 dBm, -15 dBm, LC, single-mode, 40 km, -40 to 85 C
NOTE
l Optical module specifications are explained as follows in sequence: name, encapsulation form, operating wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver sensitivity, optical interface type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance. l Optical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei offices for latest optical module specifications.
14.4 CWDM/DWDM
This topic describes the CWDM/DWDM optical modules of the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
255
CWDM Optical Module

Table 14-4 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of STM-1/ STM-4/STM-16/GE CWDM eSFP optical modules. Table 14-4 STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/GE CWDM eSFP optical modules Part Number 34060416 Name 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP optical module Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1511 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1551 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1571 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1591 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1611 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 19 dBm, LC, SM, 40 km 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s CWDM eSFP optical module Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Applicable Board PCXLX/PCXLG/PCXGA/ PCXGB/CXL/EM6F/EG4C
34060417
34060418
34060419
34060420
34060421
34060422
34060423
34060483
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
256
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1491 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1511 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1551 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1571 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1591 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1611 nm, 100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 5 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 80 km
Applicable Board
34060479
34060482
34060478
34060476
34060477
34060480
Table 14-5 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP optical modules. Table 14-5 10 Gbit/s CWDM XFP optical modules Part Number 34060547 Name 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s CWDM XFP optical module Specifications Optical transceiver, XFP, 1471 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 23 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Applicable Board PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
257
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, XFP, 1491 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 23 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1511 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 23 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 23 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1551 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 23 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1571 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 22 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1591 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 3 dBm, 21 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1611 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 3 dBm, 21 dBm, LC, SM, 70 km
Applicable Board
34060549
34060550
34060551
34060552
34060553
34060554
DWDM Optical Module

Table 14-6 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of STM-16 DWDM eSFP optical modules. Table 14-6 STM-16 DWDM eSFP optical modules Part Number 34060366 Name 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s DWDM eSFP optical module Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1560.61 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Applicable Board PCXLX/PCXLG/CXL
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
258
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1559.79 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1558.98 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1558.17 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1557.36 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1556.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1555.75 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1554.94 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1554.13 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1553.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1552.52 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km
Applicable Board
34060373
34060374
34060375
34060376
34060377
34060378
34060379
34060380
34060381
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
259
Name
Applicable Board
34060383
34060384
34060385
34060386
34060387
34060388
34060389
34060390
34060391
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
260
Name
Applicable Board
34060393
34060394
34060395
34060396
34060397
34060398
34060399
34060400
34060401
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
261
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1535.82 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1535.04 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1534.25 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1533.47 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1532.68 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531.90 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1531.12 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1530.33 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1529.55 nm, 125 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, 0 dBm, 4 dBm, 28 dBm, LC, 120 km
Applicable Board
34060403
34060404
34060405
34060406
34060407
34060408
34060409
34060410
Table 14-7 lists the part numbers, names, specifications, and applicable boards of 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical modules.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
262
Table 14-7 10 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical modules Part Number 03030LRD Name 10.71 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical module Specifications Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.10 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.20 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.30 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.40 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.50 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.60 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.70 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.80 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 192.90 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.00 THz, LC/PC Applicable Board PCXX/PCXLX/EX1
03030LRF
03030LRG
03030LRH
03030LRJ
03030LRK
03030LRL
03030LRM
03030LRN
03030LRP
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
263
Part Number 03030LRQ
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.10 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.20 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.30 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.40 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.50 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.60 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.70 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.80 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 193.90 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.00 THz, LC/PC
Applicable Board
03030LRR
03030LRS
03030LRT
03030LRU
03030LRV
03030LRW
03030LRX
03030LRY
03030LSA
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
264
Part Number 03030LSB
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.10 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.20 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.30 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.40 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.50 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.60 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.70 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.80 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 194.90 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.00 THz, LC/PC
Applicable Board
03030LSC
03030LSD
03030LSE
03030LSF
03030LSG
03030LSH
03030LSJ
03030LSK
03030LSL
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
265
Part Number 03030LSM
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.10 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.20 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.30 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.40THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.50 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.60 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.70 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.80 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 195.90 THz, LC/PC Optical transceiver, 19 dBm to 0 dBm, 1550 nm, 800 ps/ nm, 1 dBm to 2 dBm, 196.00 THz, LC/PC
Applicable Board
03030LSN
03030LSP
03030LSQ
03030LSR
03030LSS
03030LST
03030LSU
03030LSV
03030LSW
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
266
Name 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s DWDM XFP optical module
Specifications Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550.92 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1550.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531.90 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1531.12 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1549.32 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1530.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1548.51 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1529.55 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1551.72 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1532.68 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
Applicable Board
34060502
34060503
34060504
34060514
34060515
34060531
34060532
34060533
34060534
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
267
Name
Specifications Optical transceiver, XFP, 1554.13 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1553.33 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1552.52 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1535.04 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1534.25 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km Optical transceiver, XFP, 1533.47 nm, 9.95 Gbit/s to 11.1 Gbit/s, 1 dBm, 3 dBm, 24 dBm, LC, SM, 80 km
Applicable Board
34060624
34060625
34060626
34060627
34060628
NOTE
l Optical module specifications are explained as follows in sequence: name, encapsulation form, operating wavelength, rate, minimum output optical power, maximum output optical power, receiver sensitivity, optical interface type, optical fiber type, and transmission distance. l Optical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei offices for latest optical module specifications.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
268
15 Pluggable electrical Modules
15
Appearance
Pluggable electrical Modules
This chapter describes the pluggable electrical modules that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. For a board on which pluggable electrical modules are installed, if applicable service categories need to be changed or faulty electrical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only the electrical modules instead of the board.
Figure 15-1 GE SFP electrical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 66.8 mm
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
269
15 Pluggable electrical Modules
Figure 15-2 STM-1 SFP electrical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 66.8 mm
SFP Electrical Modules

Table 15-1 SFP electrical modules Part Number 34100052 Name 1000BASE-T RJ45 SFP electrical module Specification 1000BASE-T (RJ45) SFP electrical module, auto-negotiation, 100 m Electrical active module-copper transceiver, SFP, STM-1e Applicable Board EM6F/EGT1
34100104
STM-1 SFP electrical module
SL1D/SL1Q/CXL/ CQ1
NOTE
Optical/Electrical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local Huawei offices for the latest optical module specifications.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
270
16 Cables
16
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the cables used on the equipment. 16.1 Fiber Jumper A fiber jumper has one connector at each end.
Cables
16.2 DC Power Cable A DC power cable connects the PIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access of power to the chassis. 16.3 AC Power Cable An AC power cable connects the APIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access of AC power to the chassis. 16.4 UPM Power Cable This section describes the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of UPM power cables. 16.5 PGND Cable A PGND cable connects the grounding point of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis to the grounding point of external equipment so that the chassis and external equipment share the same ground. 16.6 STM-1 Cable An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required. 16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable An 16xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 16 E1/T1 signals. 16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable An 21xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 21 E1/T1 signals. 16.9 E3/T3 Cable An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3 cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
16 Cables
16.10 Network Cable A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
272
16 Cables
16.1 Fiber Jumper

A fiber jumper has one connector at each end. A fiber jumper transmits optical signals. One end of the fiber jumper has an LC/PC connector that is connected to an SDH optical port or GE optical port on the OptiX OSN 550. The connector at the other end of the fiber jumper varies depending on the type of the interconnected optical port.
Types of Fiber Jumpers

Table 16-1 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Cable 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC LC/PC 2 mm single-mode fiber 2 mm multi-mode fiber
Fiber Connectors
The following figures show two common types of fiber connectors: LC/PC connector and FC/ PC connector. Figure 16-1 LC/PC connector
LC/PC connector Protective cap
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
273
16 Cables
Figure 16-2 FC/PC connector

Protective cap
FC/PC connector
16.2 DC Power Cable

A DC power cable connects the PIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access of power to the chassis.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-3 DC power cable
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
274
16 Cables
Table 16-2 Power cable specifications Model 4 mm2 power cable and terminal Cable Power cable, 450 V/ 750 V, H07Z-K, 4 mm2, blue/black, low smoke zero halogen cable Terminal Bare crimping terminal, single cord end terminal, 4 mm2, 20 A, insertion depth of 10 mm, grey
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 550, power cables with a 4 mm2 cross-sectional area can extend for a maximum distance of 40 meters.
16.3 AC Power Cable

An AC power cable connects the APIU board in the chassis to a power supply device for access of AC power to the chassis.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-4 AC power cable
Specifications of an AC power cable connector used on the OptiX OSN 550: C13, straight, female
16.4 UPM Power Cable

This section describes the structure, pin assignments, and technical specifications of UPM power cables.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
275
16 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-5 UPM power cable
Label 2 X2 Label 1 X3 W1 W2 Main label A X1
1 2
Pin Assignments
Table 16-3 Pin assignments of UPM power cables Cable Connectors X2 and X3 X2 X3 Correspondi ng Cable W1 W2 Cable Connector X1 1 2 Core Color
Blue (-48 V/-60 V power) Black (power ground)
Table 16-4 Technical specifications of UPM power cables Item Cable connector X1 Cable connector X2 Cab le Model Description Bare crimp terminal, single core end terminal, 2.5 mm2 Common connector, 2-pin, single row Power cable, 600 V, UL1015, 16 AWG, blue Power cable, 600 V, UL1015, 16 AWG, black Number of cores Fireproof class Color Length 1 VW-1 Blue and black 1.8 meters
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
276
16 Cables
16.5 PGND Cable

A PGND cable connects the grounding point of an OptiX OSN 550 chassis to the grounding point of external equipment so that the chassis and external equipment share the same ground.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-6 PGND cable
Main label 1 Cable tie H.S.tube
1. Bare crimping terminal, OT
2. Bare crimping terminal, OT
16.6 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-7 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male
2. Main label
3. Coaxial cable
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
277
16 Cables
Pin Assignments
None.
Item Connector Cable model Number of cores Core diameter Description Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/male Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded One Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm) 10 m CM
Length Fireproof class
16.7 16xE1/T1 Cable

An 16xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 16 E1/T1 signals. There are two types of 16xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
NOTE
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance. The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial connector.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
278
16 Cables
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-8 75-ohm/120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable
Main label 1 W
X1
A ViewA Pos.96 Cable connector, Anea, 96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
Pin Assignments
16xTable 16-5 provides details about the pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable. Table 16-5 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable Pin Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 5 R2 4 T1 3 R1 2 T0 Seri al No. 1 Lab el R0 Pin Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 17 R8 16 T7 15 R7 14 T6 Seri al No. 13 Lab el R6 Pin Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
279
Seri al No. 25
Lab el R12
1 2 25 26 3 4 27 28 5 6
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
13 14 37 38 15 16 39 40 17 18
49 50 73 74 51 52 75 76 53 54
26
T12
27
R13
28
T13
29
R14
16 Cables
Pin
Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Seri al No. 6
Lab el T2
Pin
Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Seri al No. 18
Lab el T8
Pin
Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Seri al No. 30
Lab el T14
29 30 7 8 31 32 9 10 33 34 11 12 35 36
41 42
77 78
R3
19 20
19
R9
55 56
31
R15
T3
43 44
20
T9
79 80
32
T15
R4
21 22
21
R10
10
T4
45 46
22
T10
11
R5
23 24
23
R11
12
T5
47 48
24
T11
Table 16-6 provides details about the pin assignments for a 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable. Table 16-6 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable Ri bb on Co lor Blu e Pi n Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Blu e Wh ite Or ang e T0 Pai r La bel Re lat io ns hi p Pai r Ri bb on Co lor Or ang e Pi n Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Blu e Wh ite Or ang e T7 Pai r La bel Re lat io ns hi p Pai r Ri bb on Co lor Gre en Pi n Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Blu e Wh ite Or ang e T1 4 Pai r La bel Re lat io ns hi p Pai r
1 2 25 26
R0
15 16 39 40
R7
53 54 77 78
R1 4
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
280
16 Cables
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Gr een Wh ite Br ow n Wh ite Gr ay Re d Blu e Re d Or ang e Re d Gr een Re d Br ow n Re d Gr ay
La bel
Re lat io ns hi p Pai r
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Gr een Wh ite Br ow n Wh ite Gr ay Re d Blu e Re d Or ang e Re d Gr een Re d Br ow n Re d Gr ay
La bel
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Gr een Wh ite Br ow n
La bel
3 4 27 28
R1
17 18
R8
55 56
R1 5
T1
Pai r
41 42
T8
Pai r
79 80
T1 5
Pai r
5 6 29 30 7 8
R2
Pai r
19 20
R9
Pai r
T2
Pai r
43 44
T9
Pai r
R3
Pai r
21 22
R1 0
Pai r
31 32 9 10
T3
Pai r
45 46
T1 0
Pai r
R4
Pai r
23 24
R1 1
Pai r
33 34
T4
Pai r
47 48
T1 1
Pai r
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
281
16 Cables
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re Bla ck Blu e Bla ck Or ang e Bla ck Gr een Bla ck Br ow n
La bel
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re Bla ck Blu e Bla ck Or ang e Bla ck Gr een Bla ck Br ow n
La bel
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re
La bel
Re lat io ns hi p
11 12 35 36
R5
49 50
R1 2
T5
Pai r
73 74
T1 2
Pai r
13 14 37 38
R6
Pai r
51 52
R1 3
Pai r
T6
Pai r
75 76
T1 3
Pai r
Table 16-7 lists the technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550. Table 16-7 Technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550 Item Connector type Number of cores Fireproof class Description Anea 96 32 cores/pair IEC60332-3C
16.8 21xE1/T1 Cable

An 21xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 21 E1/T1 signals. There are two types of 21xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
NOTE
16 Cables
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance. The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1 coaxial connector.
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-9 75-ohm/120-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable
Main label 1 W
X1
A ViewA Pos.96 Cable connector, Anea, 96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
Pin Assignments
Table 16-8 provides details about the pin assignments for a 75-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable. Table 16-8 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable Pin Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 3 R1 2 T0 Seri al No. 1 Lab el R0 Pin Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring 17 R8 16 T7 Seri al No. 15 Lab el R7 Pin Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
283
Seri al No. 29
Lab el R14
1 2 25 26 3 4
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
15 16 39 40 17 18
53 54 77 78 55 56
30
T14
31
R15
16 Cables
Pin
Cor e Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring
Seri al No. 4
Lab el T1
Pin
Seri al No. 18
Lab el T8
Pin
Seri al No. 32
Lab el T15
27 28 5 6 29 30 7 8 31 32 9 10 33 34 11 12 35 36 13 14 37 38
41 42
79 80
R2
19 20
19
R9
57 58
33
R16
T2
43 44
20
T9
81 82
34
T16
R3
21 22
21
R10
59 60
35
R17
T3
45 46
22
T10
83 84
36
T17
R4
23 24
23
R11
61 62
37
R18
10
T4
47 48
24
T11
85 86
38
T18
11
R5
49 50
25
R12
63 64
39
R19
12
T5
73 74
26
T12
87 88
40
T19
13
R6
51 52
27
R13
65 66
41
R20
14
T6
75 76
28
T13
89 90
42
T20
Table 16-9 provides details about the pin assignments for a 120-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
284
16 Cables
Table 16-9 Pin assignments for a 120-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable Ri bb on Co lor Blu e Pi n Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Blu e Wh ite Or ang e Wh ite Gr een Wh ite Br ow n Wh ite Gr ay Re d Blu e Re d Or ang e Re d T3 Pai r R3 Pai r T2 Pai r R2 Pai r T1 Pai r R1 Pai r T0 Pai r La bel Re lat io ns hi p Pai r Ri bb on Co lor Or ang e Pi n Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Blu e Wh ite Or ang e Wh ite Gr een Wh ite Br ow n Wh ite Gr ay Re d Blu e Re d Or ang e Re d T1 0 Pai r R1 0 Pai r T9 Pai r R9 Pai r T8 Pai r R8 Pai r T7 Pai r La bel Re lat io ns hi p Pai r Ri bb on Co lor Gre en Pi n Co lor of the Co re Wh ite Blu e Wh ite Or ang e Wh ite Gr een Wh ite Br ow n Wh ite Gr ay Re d Blu e Re d Or ang e Re d T1 7 Pai r R1 7 Pai r T1 6 Pai r R1 6 Pai r T1 5 Pai r R1 5 Pai r T1 4 Pai r La bel Re lat io ns hi p Pai r
1 2 25 26
R0
15 16 39 40
R7
53 54 77 78
R1 4
3 4 27 28
17 18 41 42
55 56 79 80
5 6 29 30 7 8
19 20 43 44 21 22
57 58 81 82 59 60
31
45
83
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
285
16 Cables
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
Co lor of the Co re Gr een Re d Br ow n Re d Gr ay Bla ck Blu e Bla ck Or ang e Bla ck Gr een Bla ck Br ow n
La bel
Re lat io ns hi p
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
La bel
Re lat io ns hi p
Ri bb on Co lor
Pi n
La bel
Re lat io ns hi p
32 9 10
46 R4 Pai r 23 24
84 R1 1 Pai r 61 62
R1 8
Pai r
33 34 11 12 35 36
T4
Pai r
47 48
T1 1
Pai r
85 86
T1 8
Pai r
R5
Pai r
49 50
R1 2
Pai r
63 64
R1 9
Pai r
T5
Pai r
73 74
T1 2
Pai r
87 88
T1 9
Pai r
13 14 37 38
R6
Pai r
51 52
R1 3
Pai r
65 66
R2 0
Pai r
T6
Pai r
75 76
T1 3
Pai r
89 90
T2 0
Pai r
Table 16-10 lists the technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
286
16 Cables
Table 16-10 Technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN 550 Item Connector type Number of cores Fireproof class Description Anea 96 42 cores/pair IEC60332-3C
16.9 E3/T3 Cable

An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3 cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
Structure
Figure 16-10 Structure of an E3/T3 cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB
2. Main label
3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Item Connector Cable I Description Coaxial connector, SMB connector, 75 ohms, straight, female Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm) Available lengths: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m Cable II Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 4.4 mm, 2.4 mm, 0.4 mm, shielded, gray Diameter of the shield layer (4.4 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (2.4 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.4 mm)
16 Cables
Item
Description Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
Cable III
Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 6.7 mm, 3.8 mm, 0.61 mm, shielded, gray Diameter of the shield layer (6.7 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (3.8 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.61 mm) Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
Cable IV
Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 5.80 mm, 3.71 mm, 0.643 mm, black Diameter of the shield layer (5.80 mm), diameter of the internal insulation layer (3.71 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.643 mm) Available length: 30 m
Fireproof class
CM
16.10 Network Cable

A network cable connects two pieces of Ethernet equipment. Both ends of the network cable are terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Interfaces Using RJ45 Connectors

The following types of interfaces use RJ45 connectors: l l Medium dependent interfaces (MDIs): used by terminal equipment, for example, network card MDI-Xs: used by network equipment
The difference between MDIs and MDI-Xs is with regard to pin assignments. Table 16-11 provides details about the pin assignments for ports in MDI mode. Table 16-12 provides details about the pin assignments for ports in MDI-X mode. Different cables are used between the interfaces using RJ45 connectors. l l l A straight-through cable is used between an MDI and an MDI-X. A crossover cable is used between two MDIs. A crossover cable is used between two MDI-Xs.
NOTE
The NMS/COM port and Ethernet electrical service ports of the equipment support the auto-MDI/MDI-X mode. Therefore, straight-through cables and crossover cables can be used to connect the NMS/COM port and Ethernet electrical service ports to MDIs or MDI-Xs.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
288
16 Cables
Table 16-12 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-TX Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
289
16 Cables
Pin
10/100BASE-TX Signal Function -
1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)
Reserved
Cable Diagram
Figure 16-11 Straight-through cable
1. Network port connector, 2. Label 1 RJ45
3. Main label
4. Label 2
Figure 16-12 Crossover cable
1. Network port connector, RJ45
2. Label 1
3. Main label
4. Network cable
5. Label 2
Pin Assignments
Table 16-13 Pin assignments for a straight-through cable Connector X1 X1.1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
Connector X2 X2.1
Color White/Orange
Relationship Twisted pair

290
16 Cables
Connector X1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8
Connector X2 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8
Color Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown
Relationship
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Twisted pair
Table 16-14 Pin assignments for a crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color Orange White/Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Twisted pair Twisted pair Twisted pair Relationship Twisted pair
Item Connector X1/X2 Description Network port connector, RJ45 connector, 8-pin, 8-bit, shielded, connector, 24 to 26 AWG, CAT 6/configured with the SFTP network cable l Straight-through cable: communication cable, 10015 ohms, CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG, 8 cores, PANTONE 445U l Crossover cable: communication cable, 1005 ohms, CAT5E SFTP 24 AWG, 8 cores, PANTONE 646U Number of cores Fireproof class 8 cores CM
Cable type
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
291
16 Cables
Item Length
Description l Straight-through cable: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m l Crossover cable: 5 m, 30 m
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
292
17 Parameter Settings
17
Board Type System control, switching, and timing board Packet processing board Board Involved PCX, CXL
Parameter Settings
To use the functions of a board, first set parameters related to the board. This section provides hyperlinks of board parameter settings. Table 17-1 lists references for parameter settings on boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports. Table 17-1 References for parameter settings on boards that the OptiX OSN 550 supports Parameter Setting Reference Parameters for Configuring system control, switching, and timing board Parameters for Configuring Ethernet Ports Parameters for Configuring CES Ports Parameters for Configuring Channelized STM-1 Ports Parameters for Configuring SDH Boards Parameters for Configuring PDH Boards l Parameters for Configuring VC-12 Path Overheads l Parameters for Configuring Ethernet Ports Auxiliary board AUX l Parameters for Configuring Broadcast Data Interfaces l Parameters for Configuring F1 Data Service
EM6T, EM6F, EF8F, EG4C, EX1 MD1 CQ1
SDH boards PDH boards EoS boards
SL1D, SL4D, SL1Q SP3D, PL3T EFS8, EGT1
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
293
A Glossary
A
Numerics 1+1 backup 1:N protection 3G 3R 3rd Generation (3G) See 3rd Generation. reshaping, retiming, regenerating
Glossary
A backup method in which two components mirror each other. If the active component goes down, the standby component takes over services from the active component to ensure that the system service is not interrupted. An architecture that has N normal service signals, N working SNCs/trails, and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra service signal.
The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
A A/D AAA AAL AAL2 AAL5 ABR ACAP ACH ACL ACL rule ADM AF AGC analog/digit See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting. See ATM Adaptation Layer. ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5 See available bit rate. See adjacent channel alternate polarization. associated channel header See access control list. A rule for controlling the access of users. add/drop multiplexer See assured forwarding. automatic gain control
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
294
A Glossary
AIO AIS AIS insertion
asynchronous input/output alarm indication signal Insertion of AIS in a channel with excessive errors to indicate that it is unavailable. For a line board, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For tributary board at the E1/T1 level, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For tributary board at the E3 level or higher, it can be set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3 byte. See automatic laser shutdown. See adaptive modulation. See alternate mark inversion. See American National Standards Institute. See avalanche photodiode. access point identifier automatic protection switching A protection architecture that comprises one protection facility and one working facility and performs switchover by using the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) protocol. Normally, signals are sent only over the working facility. If an APS switchover event is detected by the working facility, services are switched over to the protection facility. See Address Resolution Protocol. See autonomous system. American Standard Code for Information Interchange amplitude shift keying asynchronous transfer mode An interface between higher-layer protocols and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM). The AAL provides a conversion function to and from ATM for various types of information, including voice, video, and data.
ALS AM AMI ANSI APD APID APS APS 1+1 protection
ARP AS ASCII ASK ATM ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL)
ATM protection group Logically bound ATM VP network/subnetwork connections that share the same physical transmission channel. In the VP Group (VPG), a pair of VP connections (working connection and its protective connection) is used for monitoring the automatic protection switching, called monitoring connections (APS VPCs). If the monitoring connections switch over, the whole VPG will switch over to quicken the ATM protection switching (as quick as the protection switching of the SDH layer). ATPC AU AUG AWG Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) See automatic transmit power control. See administrative unit. See administrative unit group. arrayed waveguide grating An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through ARP requests and ARP responses.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
295
A Glossary
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Authentication, Authorization and Accounting (AAA)
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry. ANSI participates in defining network protocol standards. A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the consumption of network services by users. A link between the customer and the telecommunication network. Many technologies, such as the copper wire, optical fiber, mobile, microwave and satellite, are used for access. A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access to a resource. A layer that connects the end users (or last mile) to the ISP network. The access layer devices are cost-effective and have high-density interfaces. In an actual network, the access layer includes the devices and cables between the access points and the UPEs. Any entity that has station functionality and provides access to the distribution services, via the wireless medium (WM) for associated stations. The sum of the service usage, consumption, and recharge fees of a subscriber. A link in the link aggregation group, which is connected to the active interface. A working mode of EFM OAM. The discovery and remote loopback can only be initiated by the interface in the active mode. A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode according to the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment uses a highefficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment uses the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. A portion of the local routing information which pertains to the reachability of a single neighbor ES or IS over a single circuit. Adjacencies are used as input to the Decision Process for forming paths through the routing domain. A separate adjacency is created for each neighbor on a circuit, and for each level of routing (i.e. level 1 and level 2) on a broadcast circuit. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.
access
access control list (ACL) access layer
access point accumulation active link active mode adaptive modulation (AM)
adjacency
adjacent channel alternate polarization (ACAP)
adjacent concatenation A situation where the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services in SDH are consecutive in terms of their service in the frame structures, so that they use the same path overhead (POH). administrative unit (AU) The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start. One or more administrative units occupying fixed, defined positions in an STM payload. An AUG consists of AU-4s.
administrative unit group (AUG)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
296
A Glossary
advanced ACL
An ACL that defines ACL rules based on the source addresses, target addresses, protocol type, such as TCP source or target port, the type of the ICMP protocol, and message codes. Multiple signaling link sets between two nodes. The time to live before an object becomes invalid. The interface between the cellular phone set or wireless modem (usually portable or mobile) and the active base station. A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes to cleared. A device that reflects the status of an alarm in visual-audio mode. The alarm box notifies you of the alarm generation and alarm severity after it is connected to the Signaling Network Manager server or client and the related parameters are set. The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets. A process to analyze correlated alarms. For example, if alarm 2 is generated within five seconds after alarm 1 is generated, and it complies with the conditions defined in the alarm correlation analysis rule, you can either mask the alarm or raise the level of alarm 2 according to the behavior defined in the alarm correlation rule. An alarm management method. Alarms are detected and reported to the NMS system, and whether the alarm information is displayed and saved is decided by the alarm filtering status. An alarm with the filtering status set to "Filter" is not displayed and saved on the NMS, but is monitored on the NE. A function that indicates the alarm status of an NE. On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current alarm status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, the NE is powered on. When the red indicator is on, a critical alarm is generated. When the orange indicator is on, a major alarm is generated. When the yellow indicator is on, a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board. A mode for an NE that indicates whether the port is automatically restored to the normal status after the service is accessed or the fault is removed. There are three alarm inversion modes: normal, revertible and non-revertible. When an error occurs, the performance measurement system sends performance alarms to the destination (for example, a file and/or fault management system) designated by users. An alarm management method. Alarms that are set to be suppressed are not reported from NEs any more. A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent logical 1 values. A signal in which information is represented with a continuously variable physical quantity, such as voltage. Because of this constant changing of the wave shape with regard to its passing a given point in time or space, an analog signal might have a virtually indefinite number of states or values. This contrasts with a digital signal that is expressed as a square wave and therefore has a very limited number of discrete states. Analog signals, with complicated structures and narrow bandwidth, are vulnerable to external interference.
aggregated link aging time air interface alarm
alarm box
alarm cascading alarm correlation analysis
alarm filtering
alarm indication
alarm inversion mode
alarm notification
alarm suppression alternate mark inversion (AMI) analog signal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
assured forwarding (AF)
One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF. It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets. An attempt to bypass security controls in a system with the mission of using that system or compromising it. An attack is usually accomplished by exploiting a current vulnerability. Reduction of signal magnitude or signal loss, usually expressed in decibels. A device used to increase the attenuation of an Optical Fiber Link. Generally used to ensure that the signal at the receive end is not too strong. A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
attack
attenuation attenuator automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
automatic transmit A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit signal detected power control (ATPC) at the receiver autonomous system (AS) availability A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be divided into areas. A capability of providing services at any time. The probability of this capability is called availability.
available bit rate (ABR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. ABR only provides possible forwarding service and applies to the connections that does not require the real-time quality. It does not provide any guarantee in terms of cell loss or delay. avalanche photodiode (APD) A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages. Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages than other semiconductor electronics. A performance indicator indicating the average RTT of multiple ping operations or other probe operations. It is expressed in milliseconds.
average delay
B B-ISDN BA BBE BC BCD BDI BDI packet See broadband integrated services digital network. booster amplifier background block error boundary clock binary coded decimal See backward defect indication. A packet used to notify the upstream LSR of the failure event which has occurred on the downstream LSR through the reverse LSP. The BDI packet can be used in the 1:1/N protective switchover service. See best effort. bit error rate
BE BER
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
298
A Glossary
BFD BGP BIP BIP-8 BIP-X BITS BMC BNC BPDU BPS BSC BSS BTS BWS Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD)
See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection. Border Gateway Protocol See bit interleaved parity. See bit interleaved parity-8. bit interleaved parity-X See building integrated timing supply. best master clock See bayonet-neill-concelman. See bridge protocol data unit. board protection switching See base station controller. base station subsystem base transceiver station backbone wavelength division multiplexing system A simple Hello protocol, similar to the adjacent detection in the route protocol. Two systems periodically send BFD detection messages on the channel between the two systems. If one system does not receive the detection message from the other system for a long time, you can infer that the channel is faulty. Under some conditions, the TX and RX rates between systems need to be negotiated to reduce traffic load. A network that forms the central interconnection for a connected network. The communication backbone for a country is WAN. The backbone network is an important architectural element for building enterprise networks. It provides a path for the exchange of information between different LANs or subnetworks. A backbone can tie together diverse networks in the same building, in different buildings in a campus environment, or over wide areas. Generally, the backbone network's capacity is greater than the networks connected to it. An electronic circuit board containing circuits and sockets into which additional electronic devices on other circuit boards or cards can be plugged. A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data synchronization between active and standby boards. A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path. A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate. An area of radio coverage consisting of cells served by one or more Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs) in the same base station site.
backbone network
backplane backup
backward defect indication (BDI) bandwidth
base station area
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
299
A Glossary
base station controller (BSC)
A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface. It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network. A form of modulation in which the information is applied directly onto the physical transmission medium. A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables. An information transmission path with defined capacity, delay and bit error rate. A network used to carry the messages of a transport-layer protocol between physical devices. A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter, packet loss ratio, and high reliability. A unitary and simple service model. Without being approved, but after notifying the network, the application can send any number of packets at any time. The network tries its best to send the packets, but delay and reliability cannot be ensured. Best-Effort is the default service model of the Internet. It can be applied to various networks, such as FTP and E-Mail. It is implemented through the First In First-Out (FIFO) queue. An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding bit in the received digital signal. A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by equipment at the transmit end over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, and so on. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within the Xbit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes the BIPX.
baseband bayonet-neillconcelman (BNC) bearer bearer network best effort (BE)
best-effort service
bit error bit interleaved parity (BIP)
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte) (BIP-8) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0. blacklist A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with ACL, the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list can filter packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the specific IP address. A parallel path with several serial paths bundled together. It improves the data throughput capacity.
bound path
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
300
A Glossary
bridge
A device that connects two or more networks and forwards packets among them. Bridges operate at the physical network level. Bridges differ from repeaters because bridges store and forward complete packets, while repeaters forward all electrical signals. Bridges differ from routers because bridges use physical addresses, while routers use IP addresses. The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state. The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels simultaneously.
bridge protocol data unit (BPDU)
bridging
broadband integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as voice. services digital network It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based circuits at (B-ISDN) 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed. broadcast broadcast address broadcast domain A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is determined by the broadcast address. A network address in computer networking that allows information to be sent to all nodes on a network, rather than to a specific network host. A group of network stations that receives broadcast packets originating from any device within the group. The broadcast domain also refers to the set of ports between which a device forwards a multicast, broadcast, or unknown destination frame. In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to the building integrated device. This device is called BITS. A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into products that belong to the OSN series. That is, the OSN products can add or drop several wavelengths directly. A process of forming data into a block of the proper size, uninterruptedly sending the block in a fast operation, waiting for a long time, and preparing for the next fast sending.
building integrated timing supply (BITS)
built-in WDM burst
C CAC CAR CAS multiframe See connection admission control. committed access rate A multiframe set up based on timeslot 16. Each CAS multiframe contains 16 E1 PCM frames. Among the 8 bits of timeslot 16 in the first frame, the first 4 bits are used for multiframe synchronization. The multiframe alignment signal (MFAS) for synchronization is 0000. The last 4 bits are used as the not multiframe alignment signal (NMFAS). The NMFAS is XYXX. For the other 15 frames, timeslot 16 is used to transmit exchange and multiplexing (E&M) signaling corresponding to each timeslot. See constant bit rate. See committed burst size. See continuity check.
CBR CBS CC
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
301
A Glossary
CCDP CCS CDVT CE CES CFM CFR CIR CIST CLEI CLK CLNP CLP CMI CO CPU CR CRC CRC-4 multiframe
See co-channel dual polarization. See Common Channel Signaling. cell delay variation tolerance See customer edge. See circuit emulation service. connectivity fault management cell fill rate committed information rate See Common and Internal Spanning Tree. common language equipment identification clock card connectionless network protocol See cell loss priority. coded mark inversion central office See central processing unit. connection request See cyclic redundancy check. A multiframe recommended by ITU-T G.704 and set up based on the first bit of timeslot 0. The CRC-4 multiframe is different from the CAS multiframe in principle and implementation. Each CRC-4 multiframe contains 16 PCM frames. Each CRC-4 multiframe consists of two CRC-4 sub-multiframes. Each CRC-4 sub-multiframe is a CRC-4 check block that contains 2048 (256 x 8) bits. Bits C1 to C4 of a check block can check the previous check block. Canadian Standards Association consecutive severely errored second Client Signal Fail See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection. See common spanning tree. common transmit clock connectivity verification A type of packet that is generated at the frequency of 1/s on the source end LSR of an LSP, and is terminated on the destination end LSR of the LSP. A CV packet is transmitted from the source end LSR to the destination LSR along the LSP. A CV packet contains the unique identifier (TTSI) of the LSP so that all types of abnormalities on the path can be detected. control word See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
CSA CSES CSF CSMA/CD CST CTC CV CV packet
CW CWDM
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
302
A Glossary
Common Channel Signaling (CCS)
A signaling system used in telephone networks that separates signaling information from user data. A specified channel is exclusively designated to carry signaling information for all other channels in the system.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the bridged local area network are simply and fully connected. Coordinated Universal The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained Time (UTC) atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide. cabinet Free-standing and self-supporting enclosure for housing electrical and/or electronic equipment. It is usually fitted with doors and/or side panels which may or may not be removable. A tape used to bind cables. Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer networking access method in which: l l A carrier sensing scheme is used. A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame, stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cable distribution plate A component, which is used to arrange cables in order. cable tie carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be dropped. central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets (CPU) and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computer's main data-transfer path, the bus. centralized alarm channel The alarms of all the hosts connecting to the Operation and Maintenance Unit (OMU). A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two or more locations in a network. Channels can be established through wire, radio (microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per second. For example, b/s, kb/s, Mb/s, Gb/s, and Tb/s. The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels in a WDM device. A set of rules for checking and analyzing device echo information. The check criteria for an alarm collection item need to be set through the configuration file. A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots. The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to the original sequence at the reception end.
channel spacing check criteria circuit emulation service (CES)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
303
A Glossary
clock selection
An algorithm used for selecting the best clock for clock synchronization. For different peers (multiple servers or peers configured for a client), a peer sends clock synchronization packets to each server or passive peer. After receiving the response packets, it uses the clock selection algorithm to select the best clock. A device that provides standard time for the NTP configuration. Also called frequency synchronization. The signal frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point does not need to be consistent. The method to keep the time on each node synchronized with a clock source in a network. A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The Co-Channel Dual Polarization has twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking. A condition in which two packets are being transmitted over a medium at the same time. Their interference makes both unintelligible. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
clock source clock synchronization clock tracing co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) coarse wavelength division multiplexing (CWDM) collision committed burst size (CBS)
common spanning tree A single spanning tree that connects all the MST regions in a network. Every MST region (CST) is considered as a switch; therefore, the CST can be considered as their spanning tree generated with STP/RSTP. composite service conference congestion congestion management connection An aggregation of a series of services relevant to each other. An IP multimedia session that have two or more participants. Each conference has a focus and can be identified uniquely. An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic that results in a decrease in network service efficiency. A flow control measure to solve the problem of network resource competition. When the network congestion occurs, it places packets into the queue for buffer and determines the packet forwarding order. An association of transmission channels or telecommunication circuits, switching and other functional units set up to provide for the transfer of signals between two or more network points, to support a single communication. A control process in which the network takes actions in the call set-up phase (or call renegotiation phase) to determine which connection request is admitted. A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair. Pertaining to a method of data presentation. The data has a complete destination address and is delivered by the network on a best-effort basis, independent of other data being exchanged between the same pair of users.
connection admission control (CAC) connection point
connectionless
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
304
A Glossary
constant bit rate (CBR) A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise clocking to ensure undistorted transmission. container A set of hardware or software devices. In software domain, it refers to the environment variables and processes. In hardware domain, it refers to a type of topology node that contains nodes, usually refers to one device with multiple frames; each node stands for a frame. Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved after MEPs transmit Continuity Check Messages (CCMs) periodically. A VLAN that transmits only protocol packets. The channel used to transmit digital control information from the base station to a cell phone or vice-versa. A "bridge" between the access layer and the core layer. The convergence layer provides the convergence and forwarding functions for the access layer. It processes all the traffic from the access layer devices, and provides the uplinks to the core layer. Compared with the access layer, the convergence layer devices should have higher performance, fewer interfaces and higher switching rate. In the real network, the convergence layer refers to the network between UPEs and PE-AGGs. The system that controls or influences climate by decreasing the air temperature only. A layer that functions as the backbone of high speed switching for networks and provides high speed forwarding communications. It has a backbone transmission structure that provides high reliability, high throughput, and low delay. The core layer devices must have a good redundancy, error tolerance, manageability, adaptability, and they support dual-system hot backup or load balancing technologies. In a real network, the core layer includes the IP/MPLS backbone network consisting of NPEs and backbone routers. The similarities when two random processes vary with time. The alteration of the information in IMS networks for the purpose of deception. For example, attackers corrupt the correct charging information to evade being charged. The connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between line boards inside the NE. Network services are realized through the cross-connections of NEs. A twisted pair patch cable wired in such a way as to route the transmit signals from one piece of equipment to the receive signals of another piece of equipment, and vice versa. An oscillator that produces electrical oscillations at a frequency determined by the physical characteristics of a piezoelectric quartz crystal. A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host. To migrate the data of an application system to another application system, which then provides services.
continuity check (CC) control VLAN control channel convergence layer
cooling system core layer
correlation corruption cross-connection
crossover cable crystal oscillator customer edge (CE) cutover
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
305
A Glossary
cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D D/A DB DC DC-C DC-I DC-return common (with ground) (DC-C) digital-analog converter database direct current See DC-return common (with ground). See DC-return isolate (with ground). A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment.
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited with ground) (DC-I) the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. DCC DCE DCF DCM DCN DDF DDN DHCP DLAG DM DNI DRDB DS interior node DS node DSCP DSL DSLAM DSP DTE See data communications channel. See data circuit-terminating equipment. data communication function See dispersion compensation module. See data communication network. digital distribution frame See digital data network. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. See distributed link aggregation group. See delay measurement. dual node interconnection dynamic random database A DS node located at the center of a DS domain. It is a non-DS boundary node. A DS-compliant node, which is subdivided into DS boundary node and ID interior node. differentiated services code point See digital subscriber line. See digital subscriber line access multiplexer. digital signal processing See data terminal equipment.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
306
A Glossary
DTR DVB DVB-ASI DVMRP DWDM Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP)
data terminal ready digital video broadcasting digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. See dense wavelength division multiplexing. An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters Configuration Protocol specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the host (DHCP) to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts. data backup A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss in the case of damage or failure in the original storage area.
data circuitThe equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal terminating equipment equipment (DTE) and the line. A DCE is located at a data station. The DCE may be (DCE) separate equipment, or an integral part of the DTE or intermediate equipment. The DCE may perform other functions that are normally performed at the network end of the line. data communication network (DCN) data communications channel (DCC) A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data communication function. The data channel that uses the D1D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information about operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1D3 are referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channels that are composed of bytes D4D12 are referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. A process that involves processing the data extracted from the source system, such as filtering, integration, calculation, and summary, finding and solving data inconsistency, and deleting invalid data so that the processed data meets the requirements of the destination system for the input data. An algorithm that is used to convert the data between heterogeneous data models. A method for retrieving data that is lost due to damage or misoperations. A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced by DCE. A kind of protocol data unit (PDU) which is used in Connectionless Network Protocol (CLNP), such as IP datagram, UDP datagram. A limited interruption in the ability of an item to perform a required function. The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node. In communications, the means by which a modem converts data from modulated carrier frequencies (waves that have been modified in such a way that variations in amplitude and frequency represent meaningful information) over a telephone line. Data is converted to the digital form needed by a computer to which the modem is attached, with as little distortion as possible.
data flow
data mapping data restoration data terminal equipment (DTE) datagram defect delay measurement (DM) demodulation
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) designated port
The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber. A port defined in the STP protocol. On each switch that runs the STP protocol, the traffic from the root bridge is forwarded to the designated port. The subnet connected to the STP switch receives the data traffic from the root bridge. All the ports on the root bridge are designated ports. On each subnet, there is only one designated port. When a network topology is stable, only the root port and the designated port forward traffic. Other nondesignated ports are in the blocking state, and they receive STP packets, but does not forward user traffic. A process during which the information and resources in a network are changed unexpectedly and the meanings of the information and resources are deleted or changed. A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex technology. A method that controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. A telecommunication network where information is first converted into distinct electronic pulses and then transmitted to a digital bit stream. A signal in which information is represented by a limited number of discrete states number of discrete states (for example, high and low voltages) rather than by fluctuating levels in a continuous stream, as in an analog signal. In the pulse code modulation (PCM) technology, the 8 kHz sampling frequency is used and a byte contains 8 bits in length. Therefore, a digital signal is also referred to as a byte-based code stream. Digital signals, with simple structures and broad bandwidth, are easy to shape or regenerate, and are not easily affected by external interference. A technology for providing digital connections over the copper wire or the local telephone network. DSL performs data communication over the POTS lines without affecting the POTS service. A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques. The dependence of refraction on the wavelength of light. Different wavelengths are transmitted in an optical medium at different speeds. Wavelengths reach the end of the medium at different times. As a result, the light pulse spreads and the dispersion occurs. A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the dispersion of transmitting fiber. A board-level port protection technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end. Once a link down failure occurs on a port or a hardware failure occurs on a board, the services can automatically be switched to the slave board, achieving 1+1 protection for the inter-board ports. A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
destruction digital data network (DDN) digital modulation
digital network digital signal
digital subscriber line (DSL) digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM) dispersion
dispersion compensation module (DCM) distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) domain
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
308
A Glossary
dotted decimal notation A format of IP address. IP addresses in this format are separated into four parts by a dot "." with each part is in the decimal numeral. download downstream dual-ended switching To obtain data from an upper-layer device or the server. In an access network, the direction of transmission toward the subscriber end of the link. A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected entity (for example, "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
dual-polarized antenna An antenna intended to simultaneously radiate or receive two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized. E E-Aggr E-LAN E-Line EA EBS ECC EDFA EEPROM EF EFCI EFM EFM OAM EIA EIR EMC EMI EMS EPD EPL EPLAN ERPS ESC ESCON ESD ESN ETS ETSI See Ethernet aggregation. See Ethernet local area network. See Ethernet line. encryption algorithm See excess burst size. See embedded control channel. See erbium-doped fiber amplifier. See electrically erasable programable read-only memory. See expedited forwarding. explicit forward congestion indication Ethernet in the First Mile Ethernet in the first mile OAM See Electronic Industries Alliance. See excess information rate. See electromagnetic compatibility. See electromagnetic interference. element management system early packet discard See Ethernet private line. See Ethernet private LAN service. Ethernet ring protection switching See electric supervisory channel. See enterprise system connection. electrostatic discharge See equipment serial number. European Telecommunication Standards See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
309
A Glossary
EVC EVPL EVPLAN EXP Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) EoD Ethernet
Ethernet virtual connection See Ethernet virtual private line. See Ethernet virtual private LAN service. See experimental bits. An association based in Washington, D.C., with members from various electronics manufacturers. It sets standards for electronic components. RS-232-C, for example, is the EIA standard for connecting serial components. See Ethernet over dual domains. A LAN technology that uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s or 10000 Mbit/ s. An Ethernet network features high reliability and is easy to maintain. A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet virtual connection). A type of boards. EoD boards bridge the PSN and TDM networks, enabling Ethernet service transmission across PSN and TDM networks. A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a dedicated bridge and point-to-multipoint connections. A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network. A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-multipoint connections. A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS networks. This service is carried over a shared bridge and point-to-point connections. A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Ethernet aggregation (E-Aggr) Ethernet line (E-Line) Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) Ethernet over dual domains (EoD) Ethernet private LAN service (EPLAN) Ethernet private line (EPL) Ethernet virtual private LAN service (EVPLAN) Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI) eSFP egress electric supervisory channel (ESC)
enhanced small form-factor pluggable The egress LER. The group is transferred along the LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the group is labeled. A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electrically erasable A type of EPROM that can be erased with an electrical signal. It is useful for stable programable read-only storage for long periods without electricity while still allowing reprograming. EEPROMs memory (EEPROM) contain less memory than RAM, take longer to reprogram, and can be reprogramed only a limited number of times before wearing out.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
310
A Glossary
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer, to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM) information between NEs. A type of measure taken to quickly rectify an emergency fault to recover the proper running of the related system or device and to reduce losses. A technology for layered protocols, in which a lower-level protocol accepts a message from a higher-level protocol and places it in the data portion of the lower-level frame. Protocol A's packets have complete header information, and are carried by protocol B as data. Packets that encapsulate protocol A have a B header, an A header, followed by the information that protocol A is carrying. Note that A could equal to B, as in IP inside IP. A mark on a cable, a subrack, or a cabinet for identification. A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system. It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s. A part, device, subsystem, functional unit, equipment, or system that can be considered individually. A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint". An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range. The ability of a system or component to continue normal operation despite the presence of erroneous inputs. Anything that takes place on the managed object. For example, the managed object is added, deleted, or modified.
electromagnetic interference (EMI) embedded control channel (ECC) emergency maintenance encapsulation
engineering label enterprise system connection (ESCON) entity equalization equipment serial number (ESN) erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA)
error tolerance event
excess burst size (EBS) A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. excess information rate The bandwidth for excessive or burst traffic above the CIR; it equals the result of the (EIR) actual transmission rate without the safety rate. exercise switching An operation to check whether the protection switching protocol functions properly. The protection switching is not really performed.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
311
A Glossary
expedited forwarding (EF)
The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP value of EF PHB is "101110". A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to identify the CoS of the MPLS packet. The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network segments in a WAN. The physical ID of an NE is comprised of the NE ID and extended ID. The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals. The links between the current Web site and other Web sites. Generally, external links refer to links from other Web sites to the current Web site. To read the data required by the destination system from the source system.
experimental bits (EXP) extended ID
external cable external links extract F F1 byte
The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. See fiber channel. flash database See frequency division duplex. See fiber distributed data interface. See forward defect indication. See forward defect indication packet. See frame delay variation. See fast Ethernet. See fast Ethernet port. See forward error correction. fast failure detection A path failure detection method independent from CV. Different from a CV packet, the frequency for generating FFD packets is configurable to satisfy different service requirements. By default, the frequency is 20/s. An FFD packet contains information the same as that in a CV packet. The destination end LSR processes FFD packets in the same way for processing CV packets. See Fiber Connect. first in first out queuing See frame loss ratio. See field programmable gate array. See fast protection switching.
FC FDB FDD FDDI FDI FDI packet FDV FE FE port FEC FFD FFD packet
FICON FIFO FLR FPGA FPS
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
312
A Glossary
FR FRU FTN FTP Fiber Connect (FICON) fairness
See frame relay. field replaceable unit FEC to NHLFE File Transfer Protocol A new generation connection protocol which connects the host to various control units. It carries single byte command protocol through the physical path of fiber channel, and provides higher rate and better performance than ESCON. A feature in which for any link specified in a ring network, the source node is provided with certain bandwidth capacities if the data packets transmitted by the source node are constrained by the fairness algorithm. Any network that supports transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so on. Fast Ethernet is extended based on the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables), 100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical fibers). The port that provides a rate of 100 Mbit/s. A type of pseudo wire automatic protection switching (PW APS). When the working PW is faulty, the source transmits services to the protection PW and the sink receives the services from the protection PW. FPS generally works with the interworking function (IWF) to provide end-to-end protection for services. A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external resources or intentional settings. A type of alarm caused by hardware and/or software faults, for example, board failure, or by the exception that occurs in major functions. After handling, a fault alarm can be cleared, upon which the NE reports a recovery alarm. Fault alarms are of higher severity than event alarms. The process of determining that a fault has occurred. A process wherein a fault is notified. For example, when a fault occurs on the local interface, the local interface notifies the peer of the fault through OAMPDUs. The local interface then records the fault in the log, and reports it to the NMS. 1. A radio frequency transmission line interconnecting an antenna and a transmitter or receiver. 2. For an antenna comprising more than one driven element, a radio frequency transmission Line interconnecting the antenna input and a driven element. A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
fast Ethernet (FE)
fast Ethernet port (FE port) fast protection switching (FPS)
fault
fault alarm
fault detection fault notification
feeder
fiber channel (FC)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
313
A Glossary
fiber distributed data interface (FDDI)
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on the token ring network. A trough that is used for routing fibers. General name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user information and network management information) and perform the transmission function in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs represents the connection relationship between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical fiber type. A type of semi-customized circuit used in the application specific integrated circuit (ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits but also overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the limited number of gate arrays. A combination of a series of components set between different networks or network security domains. By monitoring, limiting, and changing the data traffic across the firewall, it masks the interior information, structure and running state of the network as much as possible to protect the network security. The bandwidth that is fully reserved and is allocated periodically in a GPON system to ensure the quality of cell transmission. If a T-CONT is provided with a fixed bandwidth and does not transmit cells, the OLT can still allocate/assign the fixed bandwidth. Therefore, idle cells are transmitted to the upstream OLT from the ONU/ONT. A type of special electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) and can be erased and rewritten in blocks at a time instead of only one byte. The data stored in flash memory will not be lost if the flash memory is powered off. A type of incident, such as insertion of a large volume of data, that results in denial of service. An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. The same type of services of a user is considered one service flow. HQoS performs queue scheduling according to the services of each user. The service flows of each user are classified into four FQs, namely, CS, EF, AF, and BE. CS is assigned a traffic shaping percentage for Priority Queuing (PQ); EF, AF, and BE are assigned weights for Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ). The preceding two scheduling modes occupy a certain bandwidth each; they can act at the same time without interfering each other. A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.
fiber trough fiber/cable
field programmable gate array (FPGA)
firewall
fixed bandwidth
flash memory
flooding flow
flow queue
forward defect indication (FDI)
forward defect A packet that responds to the detected failure event. It is used to suppress alarms of the indication packet (FDI upper layer network where failure has occurred. packet)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
314
A Glossary
forward error correction (FEC) fragmentation frame delay variation (FDV)
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. A process of breaking a packet into smaller units when transmitting over a network node that does not support the original size of the packet. A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames, where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection. frame relay (FR) A packet-switching protocol used for WANs. Frame relay transmits variable-length packets at up to 2 Mbit/s over predetermined, set paths known as PVCs (permanent virtual circuits). It is a variant of X.25 but sacrifices X.25's error detection for the sake of speed. An operating condition of a clock, the output signal of which is strongly influenced by the oscillating element and not controlled by servo phase-locking techniques. In this mode the clock has never had a network reference input, or the clock has lost external reference and has no access to stored data, that could be acquired from a previously connected external reference. Free-run begins when the clock output no longer reflects the influence of a connected external reference, or transition from it. Free-run terminates when the clock output has achieved lock to an external reference. An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts. Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length. A type of data transmission rate. The service bandwidth can be 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, or 2.4 kbit/s. A state that indicates that all slots of a piece of equipment are in use, that is, the equipment has no vacant slots. A safety device that protects an electric circuit from excessive current, consisting of or containing a metal element that melts when current exceeds a specific amperage, thereby opening the circuit.
free-run mode
frequency division duplex (FDD) full rate fully loaded fuse
G G-ACH GAL GCC GCRA GE GFC GFP GNE

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
generic associated channel header generic associated channel header label general communication channel generic cell rate algorithm See gigabit Ethernet. generic flow control See Generic Framing Procedure. See gateway network element.
A Glossary
GPS GRE GSM GTS GUI Generic Framing Procedure (GFP) Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE)
See Global Positioning System. See Generic Routing Encapsulation. See Global System for Mobile Communications. See generic traffic shaping. graphical user interface A framing and encapsulation method which can be applied to any data type. It has been standardized by ITU-T SG15. A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network. GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently transmitting data packets. A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and timing services to worldwide users. The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS). The difference between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber, which expressed in dB. A device that connects two network segments using different protocols. It is used to translate the data in the two network segments. A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer. A flow control that is applicable to the A interface, C/D interface, and trunks and can be achieved by integrating multiple function modules. It is adopted when the traffic is heavy, or location update and authentication of multiple subscribers are performed after the system restarts. It can efficiently prevent system breakdown caused by link congestion or CPU overload.
Global Positioning System (GPS) Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) gain
gateway gateway network element (GNE) general flow control
generic traffic shaping A traffic control measure that proactively adjusts the output speed of the traffic. This is (GTS) to adapt the traffic to network resources that can be provided by the downstream router to avoid packet discarding and congestion. gigabit Ethernet (GE) A collection of technologies for transmitting Ethernet frames at a rate of a gigabit per second, as defined by the IEEE 802.3z standard. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet. It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge (switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth. In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus. A connection terminal on a communication device. It is used to connect the device with ground cables, maintaining a tight connection between the device and the grounding electrode.
ground terminal
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
316
A Glossary
H HCS HD-SDI HDB3 HDLC HDTV HEC HPA HPT HQoS HSDPA HSI High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) hang up hardware loopback header error control (HEC) hello packet higher order connection supervision See high definition-serial digital interface signal. high density bipolar of order 3 code High-Level Data Link Control See high definition television. See header error control. high order path adaptation higher order path termination See hierarchical quality of service. See High Speed Downlink Packet Access. high-speed Internet A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without changing the WCDMA network topology. A call processing mode used by an attendant to end the conversation with a user. A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback. A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in the first four header bits and also at the receiving end. The commonest packet which is periodically sent by a router to its neighbors. It contains information about the DR, Backup Designated Router (BDR), known neighbors and timer values. A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis. A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540 progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines. High definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
hierarchical quality of service (HQoS)
high definition television (HDTV) high definition-serial digital interface signal (HD-SDI)
historical performance The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported data and stored on the NMS. hop A network connection between two distant nodes. For Internet operation a hop represents a small step on the route from one main computer to another.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
317
A Glossary
hot patch
A patch that is used to repair a deficiency in the software or add a new feature to a program without restarting the software and interrupting the service. For the equipment using the built-in system, a hot patch can be loaded, activated, confirmed, deactivated, deleted, or queried.
I IANA IC ICC ICMP ICP IDU IEEE IETF IF IGMP IGMP snooping See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority. See integrated circuit. ITU carrier code See Internet Control Message Protocol. IMA Control Protocol See indoor unit. See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. See Internet Engineering Task Force. See intermediate frequency. See Internet Group Management Protocol. A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently. See Interior Gateway Protocol. incoming label map See inverse multiplexing over ATM. A control unit in the IMA protocol. It is a logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l, transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group. Internet Protocol A 32-bit (4-byte) binary digit that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets. An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of decimal values of its 4 bytes, separated by periods (,), for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of an IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identifies the host itself. See intelligent power adjustment. See Internet Protocol television. See Internet Protocol version 4. See Internet Protocol version 6. See Intermediate System to Intermediate System. integrated services digital network International Organization for Standardization See Internet service provider.
IGP ILM IMA IMA frame IP IP address
IPA IPTV IPv4 IPv6 IS-IS ISDN ISO ISP

Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
IST ITC ITU ITU-T IWF Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP)
internal spanning tree independent transmit clock See International Telecommunication Union. See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector. Interworking Function A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical, electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters. A routing protocol that is used within an autonomous system. The IGP runs in smallsized and medium-sized networks. The commonly used IGPs are the routing information protocol (RIP), the interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP), the enhanced IGRP (EIGRP), and the open shortest path first (OSPF).
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network. (IS-IS) International Telecommunication Union (ITU) International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T) Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and radio networks (ITU-R). An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For example, X.25 comes from the "X" series which deals with data networks and open system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks. A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite, including autonomous system numbers. A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1). A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet. Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups that concentrate on specific topics such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard. One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
319
A Glossary
Internet Protocol television (IPTV)
A system in which video is transmitted in IP packets. Also called "TV over IP", IPTV uses streaming video techniques to deliver scheduled TV programs or video-on-demand (VOD). Unlike transmitting over the air or through cable to a TV set, IPTV uses the transport protocol of the Internet for delivery and requires either a computer and software media player or an IPTV set-top box to decode the images in real time. The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to 255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host within the network or subnetwork. An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits while an IPv6 address has 128 bits. An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services. Data transmission from the external link to the router for the routers that support the NetStream feature. Description of a performance feature collected from the managed devices by the performance collector. The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and intermediate frequency (IF) processing for services. The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30second measurement intervals. The loss of power that results from inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler, or splice, into a previously continuous path. A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function. A mechanism used to reduce the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. If the fiber is broken, the device performance degrades, or the connector is not plugged well, the loss of optical signals may occur. With IPA, maintenance engineers will not be hurt by the laser sent out from the slice of broken fiber. A process of systematically changing the bit sequence of a digital signal, usually as part of the channel coding, in order to reduce the influence of error bursts that may occur during transmission.
Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)
Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
Internet service provider (ISP) inbound indicator indoor unit (IDU) input jitter tolerance
insertion loss integrated circuit (IC) intelligent power adjustment (IPA)
interleaving
intermediate frequency The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF (IF) signal. inverse multiplexing over ATM (IMA) A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
320
A Glossary
J jitter jumper K K byte L L2 switching L2VPN LACP LACPDU LAG LAN LAPS LB LBM LBR LC LCAS LCN LCT LDP LED LER LIFO LIU LL LLC LLID LM LOC LOM LOP LOS The switching based on the data link layer. Layer 2 virtual private network See Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit See link aggregation group. See local area network. Link Access Protocol-SDH See loopback. See loopback message. See loopback reply. Lucent connector See link capacity adjustment scheme. local communications network local craft terminal Label Distribution Protocol See light emitting diode. See label edge router. See last in first out. logical interface unit logical link See logical link control. local loopback ID See loss measurement. loss of continuity loss of multiframe loss of pointer See loss of signal. A general designation of K1 byte and K2 byte in the SDH. Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system instability. A connection wire for connecting two pins.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
321
A Glossary
LP LPA LPF LPT LSP LSR LT LTM LTR LU Layer 2 switching
lower order path low order path adaptation See low-pass filter. link-state pass through See label switched path. See label switching router. linktrace See linktrace message. See linktrace reply. line unit A data forwarding method. In a LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is at the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called Layer 2 switching. A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE 802.3ad. A short identifier that is of fixed length and local significance. It is used to uniquely identify the FEC to which a packet belongs. It does not contain topology information. It is carried in the header of a packet and does not contain topology information. Packets with the same destination address belong to an FEC. A label out of an MPLS label resource pool is allocated to the FEC. LSRs record the relationship of the label and the FEC. Then, LSRs sends a message and advertises to upstream LSRs about the label and FEC relationship in message. The process is called label distribution.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) label
label distribution
label edge router (LER) A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain. label space label switched path (LSP) label switching router (LSR) Value range of the label allocated to peers. A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on common routing mechanisms or through configuration. Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table, creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to groups received in the label forwarding table. A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor laser as the light source. A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information.
laser
last in first out (LIFO) A play mode of the voice mails, the last voice mail is played firstly. layer
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
322
A Glossary
license
A permission that the vendor provides for the user with a specific function, capacity, and duration of a product. A license can be a file or a serial number. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes. The operation authority granted varies with the level of the license. A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical mice and laser-class printers. The maximum packet forwarding capacity on a cable. The value of line rate equals the maximum transmission rate capable on a given type of media. linear multiplex section protection
light emitting diode (LED)
line rate linear MSP
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link (LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS) LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the responsibility of the network and element management systems. A mechanism for an interface to notify the peer of the fault when the interface detects that the number of errored frames, errored codes, or errored frame seconds reaches or exceeds the specified threshold. Protection provided by the bypass tunnel for the link on the working tunnel. The link is a downstream link adjacent to the point of local repair (PLR). When the PLR fails to provide node protection, the link protection should be provided. The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP. LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC address of the destination MEP2. For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is called LTR. LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the TTL of LTM minus 1. The distribution of activity across two or more servers or components in order to avoid overloading any one with too many requests or too much traffic. A device running mode. Two or more hardware units can averagely share the system load based on their processing capabilities when they are operating normally. When a hardware unit fails, the other units fulfill the tasks of the faulty unit on the precondition for guaranteeing system performance, for example, few call loss. A process of importing information from the storage device to the memory to facilitate processing (when the information is data) or execution (when the information is program). An MEP of a device on a network enabled with Ethernet CFM.
link monitoring
link protection
linktrace message (LTM) linktrace reply (LTR)
load balancing load sharing
loading
local MEP
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
323
A Glossary
local area network (LAN)
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet, FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/ s (that is, 1 Gbit/s). An interface that does not exist physically and comes into being through configuration. It can also exchange data. According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media (such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN). A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop. The loopback packet sent by the node that supports 802.2ag MAC Ping to the destination node. LBM message carries its own sending time. A response message involved in the 802.2ag MAC Ping function, with which the destination MEP replies to the source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LBM. The LBR carries the sending time of LBM, the receiving time of LBM and the sending time of LBR.
logical interface logical link control (LLC) loopback (LB) loopback message (LBM) loopback reply (LBR)
loss measurement (LM) A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames between a pair of MEPs. loss of signal (LOS) low-pass filter (LPF) lower subrack lower threshold No transitions occurring in the received signal. A filter designed to transmit electromagnetic frequencies below a certain value, while excluding those of a higher frequency. The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet that contains several subracks. A lower performance limit which when exceeded by a performance event counter will trigger a threshold-crossing event.
M MA MAC MAC address MAC address aging MADM MAN MBS MCF MCR MD MDP maintenance association See Media Access Control. A link layer address or physical address. It is six bytes long. A function that deletes MAC address entries of a device when no packets are received from this device within a specified time period. multiple add/drop multiplexer See metropolitan area network. maximum burst size message communication function minimum cell rate See maintenance domain. message dispatch process
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
324
A Glossary
ME MEG MEL MEP MFAS MIP MLD MP MPID MPLS MPLS TE MPLS VPN MPLS-TP MS MSA MSB MSOH MSP MST MST region MSTI MSTP MTBF MTIE MTTR MTU MUX Media Access Control (MAC)
See maintenance entity. maintenance entity group maintenance entity group level See maintenance entity group end point. See multiframe alignment signal. See maintenance entity group intermediate point. See multicast listener discovery. maintenance point maintenance point identification See Multiprotocol Label Switching. multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering See multiprotocol label switching virtual private network. See transport profile for multiprotocol label switching. multiplex section multiplex section adaptation most significant bit multiplex section overhead See multiplex section protection. See multiplex section termination. See Multiple Spanning Tree region. See multiple spanning tree instance. See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. See mean time between failures. maximum time interval error See mean time to repair. See maximum transmission unit. See multiplexer. A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer. A protocol used to set up and maintain multicast routes, and to correctly and effectively forward multicast packets. The multicast route is used to set up a loop-free transmission path from the source to multiple receivers, that is, the multicast distribution tree.
Multicast Routing Protocol
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
325
A Glossary
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN because in STP/ RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs. A region that consists of switches that support the MSTP in the LAN and links among them. Switches physically and directly connected and configured with the same MST region attributes belong to the same MST region. A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of networks, and is beneficial to routing. A basic component of a human-machine interface. It is the default client interface of the NMS and intuitively displays the structure of a network, NEs on the network, subnets in the network as well as the NE communication and running status, reflecting the overall network running status. The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP). An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
Multiple Spanning Tree region (MST region) Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS)
main topology
maintenance domain (MD) maintenance entity (ME)
maintenance entity An end point of a MEG, which is able to initialize and stop the transmission of OAM group end point (MEP) data packets for fault management and performance monitoring. maintenance entity group intermediate point (MIP) management information An intermediate point in a MEG, which is able to forward OAM packets and respond to some OAM packets, but unable to initiate the transmission of OAM packets or perform any operations on network connections. The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
maximum transmission The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies, unit (MTU) depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks involved. mean time between failures (MTBF) mean time to repair (MTTR) measurement period medium The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure of the reliability of the system. The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure. The interval for NEs to report measurement results to the Network Management System (NMS). A physical medium for storing computer information. A medium is used for data duplication and keeping the data for some time. Original data can be obtained from a medium.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
326
A Glossary
member
A basic element for forming a dimension according to the hierarchy of each level. Each member represents a data element in a dimension. For example, January 1997 is a typical member of the time dimension. A network that interconnects users with computer resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large LAN but smaller than the area covered by an WAN. The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network. The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum with much longer wavelengths than infrared radiation, typically above about 1 mm. The duplication of data for backup or to distribute network traffic among several computers with identical data. A port association solution developed as a supplementary to smart link. A method that an inspector uses to inspect a service agent. By monitoring a service agent, an inspector can check each detailed operation performed by the service agent during the conversation and operate the GUI used by the service agent. The inspector helps the service agent to provide better service. An auxiliary or associated condition or component of a device. A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or components. A process of transmitting data packets from one source to many destinations. The destination address of the multicast packet uses Class D address, that is, the IP address ranges from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Each multicast address represents a multicast group rather than a host. A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network. A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
metropolitan area network (MAN)
microwave mirroring monitor link monitoring
mounting mounting ear multicast
multicast listener discovery (MLD)
multiframe alignment signal (MFAS)
multiple spanning tree A type of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST Region, to provide a simply instance (MSTI) and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs. multiplex section protection (MSP) multiplex section termination (MST) multiplexer (MUX) A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel. A function, which is performed to generate the MSOH during the process of forming an SDH frame signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction. Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex section. An Internet Protocol (IP) virtual private network (VPN) based on the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology. It applies the MPLS technology for network routers and switches, simplifies the routing mode of core routers, and combines traditional routing technology and label switching technology. It can be used to construct the broadband Intranet and Extranet to meet various service requirements.
multiprotocol label switching virtual private network (MPLS VPN)
N N+1 protection NAS NC NE ID NGN NHLFE NLP NM NMC NNI NP NPC NPE NRT-VBR NRZ NRZ code NRZI NSAP NSF NTP NTP client (NC) A radio link protection system composed of N working channels and one protection channel. network access server See NTP client. An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a unique NE ID. See next generation network. next hop label forwarding entry normal link pulse network management network management center network-to-network interface See network processor. See network parameter control. network provider edge non-real-time variable bit rate non-return to zero non-return-to-zero code non-return to zero inverted See network service access point. non-stop forwarding Network Time Protocol A bottom-level device in the time synchronization network. An NTP client obtains time from its upper-level NTP server without providing the time synchronization service. Compared with the top-level NTP server, the middle-level NTP server sometimes is called an NTP client. Layer 3 of the seven-layer OSI model of computer networking. The network layer provides routing and addressing so that two terminal systems are interconnected. In addition, the network layer provides congestion control and traffic control. In the TCP/ IP protocol suite, the functions of the network layer are specified and implemented by IP protocols. Therefore, the network layer is also called IP layer.
network layer
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
network parameter control (NPC)
During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
network processor (NP) An integrated circuit which has a feature set specifically targeted at the networking application domain. Network Processors are typically software programmable devices and would have generic characteristics similar to general purpose CPUs that are commonly used in many different types of equipment and products. network segment network service A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others. A service that needs to be enabled at the network layer and maintained as a basic service.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can point (NSAP) access OSI network services. network storm A phenomenon that occurs during data communication. To be specific, mass broadcast packets are transmitted in a short time; the network is congested; transmission quality and availability of the network decrease rapidly. The network storm is caused by network connection or configuration problems. A packet-based network aimed to address requirement of various services. It adopts an integrated and open network framework. In NGN, services are separated from call control; call control is separated from bearer. In this way, services are independent of network. NGN can provide various services, such as voice services, data services, multimedia services or the integration of several services. A measure of degradation of the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), caused by components in a radio frequency (RF) signal chain. The noise figure is defined as the ratio of the output noise power of a device to the portion thereof attributable to thermal noise in the input termination at standard noise temperature T0 (usually 290 K). The noise figure is thus the ratio of actual output noise to that which would remain if the device itself did not introduce noise. It is a number by which the performance of a radio receiver can be specified. See non-gateway network element. A network element that communicates with the NM application layer through the gateway NE application layer.
next generation network (NGN)
noise figure
non-GNE non-gateway network element (non-GNE) O O&M OA OADM OAM OAMPDU OAU OC OCP
operation and maintenance optical amplifier See optical add/drop multiplexer. See operation, administration and maintenance. operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit See optical amplifier unit. ordinary clock optical channel protection
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
329
A Glossary
OCS ODF ODU OFS OHA OHP OLT ONU OPEX OPU OSC OSI OSN OSNR OSPF OTDR OTM OTN OTU OTUk Open Shortest Path First (OSPF)
optical core switching optical distribution frame See outdoor unit. out-of-frame second overhead access overhead processing optical line terminal See optical network unit. operating expense optical channel payload unit See optical supervisory channel. See open systems interconnection. optical switch node See optical signal-to-noise ratio. See Open Shortest Path First. See optical time domain reflectometer. optical terminal multiplexer optical transport network See optical transponder unit. optical channel transport unit-k A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed with the network topology which is identical on all routers in the area. Pertaining to the disconnection between a device or a service unit and the system or the network, or no running of a device and service unit. A state indicating that a computer device or program is activated and is ready for operations, and can communicate with a computer or can be controlled by the computer. A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user. Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above. Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions. A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation, support activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification, location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an operational state, and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber access network to users/subscribers.
offline online open systems interconnection (OSI)
operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
330
A Glossary
optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) optical amplifier unit (OAU) optical attenuator
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel. A board that is mainly responsible for amplifying optical signals. The OAU can be used in both the transmitting direction and the receiving direction. A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator. A component normally attached to an optical cable or a piece of apparatus to provide frequent optical interconnection/disconnection of optical fibers or cables. A thin filament of glass or other transparent material, through which a signal-encoded light beam may be transmitted using total internal reflection. A component that connects several transmit or receive units. A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to individual subscribers. The ratio of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. OSNR = signal power/noise power. A passive component, which is used for splitting and sending optical power to multiple ONUs connected by an optical fiber. In a GPON system that consists of the OLT, ONU, splitter, and optical fibers, according to the split ratio, the optical signal over the optical fiber connected to the OLT is splitted into multiple channels of optical signals and send each channel to each ONU. Split ratio determines how many channels of optical signals an optical fiber can be split to. A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain channel. A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light loss and locate the fiber fault. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength. A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for radio frequency (RF) signals.
optical connector optical fiber optical interface optical network unit (ONU) optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) optical splitter
optical supervisory channel (OSC) optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) optical transponder unit (OTU) orderwire outdoor unit (ODU)
P P2MP P2P PA PADR PBS point-to-multipoint See point-to-point service. power amplifier PPPoE active discovery request See peak burst size.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
331
A Glossary
PCB PCM PCR PCS PDH PDU PE PGND cable PHB PIM-DM PIM-SM PKT PLL PM PMD POH POS PPD PPI PPP PPPoE PPS PQ PRBS PRC PSD PSN PSTN PSU PT PTI PTN PTP PVC PVID
See printed circuit board. See pulse code modulation. See peak cell rate. physical coding sublayer See plesiochronous digital hierarchy. See power distribution unit. See provider edge. A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one half of the cable is yellow, whereas the other half is green. See per-hop behavior. Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode partition knowledge table See phase-locked loop. performance monitoring polarization mode dispersion path overhead See packet over SDH/SONET. partial packet discard PDH physical interface Point-to-Point Protocol Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet port protection switching See priority queuing. See pseudo random binary sequence. primary reference clock See power spectrum density. See packet switched network. See public switched telephone network. power supply unit payload type payload type indicator packet transport network Precision Time Protocol permanent virtual channel See port default VLAN ID.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
332
A Glossary
PVP PW PWE3 packet discarding
See permanent virtual path. See pseudo wire. See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge. A function of discarding the packets from unknown VLAN domain or broadcast packets. Packet Discarding is used to prevent the situation where unknown packets or broadcast packets use the bandwidth on a link, improving the reliability of service transmission. An action performed by a router to forward a received datagram, where the destination IP address does not match the IP address of the router, to another router or destination host on the router list. The discarding of data packets in a network when a device is overloaded and cannot accept any incoming data at a given moment. A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN. The number of bits or bytes passed within a specified time. It is expressed in bits/s or bytes/s. A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode. A network technology in which information is transmitted by means of exchanging packets and the bandwidth of a channel can be shared by multiple connections. Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the backplane. A check bit appended to an array of binary digits to make the sum of all the binary digits, including the check bit, always odd or always even. A method for character level error detection. An extra bit is added to a string of bits, usually a 7-bit ASCII character, so that the total number of bits 1 is odd or even (odd or even parity). Both ends of a data transmission must use the same parity. When the transmitting device frames a character, it counts the numbers of 1s in the frame and attaches the appropriate parity bit. The recipient counts the 1s and, if there is parity error, may ask for the data to be retransmitted. A maintenance operation of removing a faulty part or a part to be examined from a running device and then installing a new part. A working mode of EFM OAM. An interface in the passive mode cannot initiate the discovery and remote loopback. An independent software unit used for fixing the bugs in software. A parameter that is used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that PBS should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded. See also CIR, CBS, and PIR. The maximum rate at which an ATM connection can accept cells. BGP speakers that exchange information with each other.
packet forwarding
packet loss packet over SDH/ SONET (POS) packet rate packet switched network (PSN) packet switching paired slots parity bit parity check
parts replacement passive mode patch peak burst size (PBS)
peak cell rate (PCR) peer
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
333
A Glossary
per-hop behavior (PHB)
IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding (EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE). An alarm generated when the actual result of a measurement entity equals the predefined logical expression for threshold or exceeds the predefined threshold. The performance parameters identify some indexes to scale the general performance of the system. The indexes include the number of managed nodes, number of supported clients and log database capacity. The parameters are sorted into static parameters, dynamic parameters and networking bandwidth parameters. The memory space for performance event counts, including 15-min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min historical performance register, 24-hour historical performance register, UAT register and CSES register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
performance alarm performance parameters
performance register
performance threshold A limit for generating an alarm for a selected entity. When the measurement result reaches or exceeds the preset alarm threshold, the performance management system generates a performance alarm. permanent virtual path Virtual path that consists of PVCs. (PVP) phase phase-locked loop (PLL) The relative position in time within a single period of a signal. A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the incoming or reference frequency. Layer 1 in the Open System Interconnection (OSI) architecture; the layer that provides services to transmit bits or groups of bits over a transmission link between open systems and which entails electrical, mechanical and handshaking. The link between two physical network elements (NEs). When the user creates NEs or refreshes the device status, the system automatically creates the physical link according to the topology structure information on the device. The remark information of a physical link can be modified, but the physical link cannot be deleted. A method used to test whether a device in the IP network is reachable according to the sent ICMP Echo messages and received response messages. A test that is performed to send a data packet to the target IP address (a unique IP address on the device on the network) to check whether the target host exists according to the data packet of the same size returned from the target host. A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are terminal users.
physical layer
physical link
ping ping test
plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) point-to-point service (P2P)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
334
A Glossary
pointer polarization
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to the frame reference of the transport entity on which this pointer is supported. A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave. A set of rules that are applied when the conditions for triggering an event are met. A template that is used to define the calculation rules of a charging event, for example, rating, debiting and accumulating. A policy template may contain the parameters to be instantiated. They can be used when the attributes of the condition judgment, calculation method, and action functions are carried out. A mechanism for the NMS to query the agent status and other data on a regular basis. A default VLAN ID of a port. It is allocated to a data frame if the data frame carries no VLAN tag when reaching the port. The priority that is used when a port attaches tags to Layer 2 packets. Packets received on ports with higher priorities are forwarded preferentially. A method for dynamically and properly assigning power according to the real-time status of a wireless network. When an AP runs under an AC for the first time, the AP uses its maximum transmit power. When getting reports from its neighbors (that is, other APs that are detected by the AP and managed by the same AC), the AP determines to increase or decrease its power according to the report conclusion. A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies power for the subracks in the cabinet. A process in which the MS or BS uses certain rules to adjust and control the transmit power according to the change in the channel condition and the power of the received signal.
policy policy template
polling port default VLAN ID (PVID) port priority power adjustment
power box power control
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution. (PDU) power module power off power on power spectrum density (PSD) printed circuit board (PCB) priority queuing (PQ) A module that provides power supply to other boards or modules. An operation that switches off devices during upgrade or expansion. To start up a computer; to begin a cold boot procedure; to turn on the power The power layout of random signals in the frequency domain. A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto a non-conductive substrate. A queue scheduling algorithm based on the absolute priority. According to the PQ algorithm, services of higher priorities are ensured with greater bandwidth, lower latency, and less jitter. Packets of lower priorities must wait to be sent till all packets of higher priorities are sent. In this manner, services of higher priorities are processed earlier than others.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
335
A Glossary
private line protection path provider edge (PE)
A line, such as a subscriber cable and trunk cable, which are leased by the telecommunication carrier and are used to meet the special user requirements. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection. A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the sequence (PRBS) values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences. pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of a edge-to-edge (PWE3) telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates to the real situation. public switched telephone network (PSTN) pulse A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS. A variation above or below a normal level and a given duration in electrical energy.
pulse code modulation A method of encoding information in a signal by changing the amplitude of pulses. (PCM) Unlike pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), in which pulse amplitude can change continuously, pulse code modulation limits pulse amplitudes to several predefined values. Because the signal is discrete, or digital, rather than analog, pulse code modulation is more immune to noise than PAM. Q QA QAM QPSK QinQ Q adaptation See quadrature amplitude modulation. See quadrature phase shift keying. A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2 VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over private VLANs. See quality of service. Both an analog and a digital modulation scheme. It conveys two analog message signals, or two digital bit streams, by changing (modulating) the amplitudes of two carrier waves, using the amplitude-shift keying (ASK) digital modulation scheme or amplitude modulation (AM) analog modulation scheme. These two waves, usually sinusoids, are out of phase with each other by 90 and are thus called quadrature carriers or quadrature components hence the name of the scheme.
QoS quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
336
A Glossary
quadrature phase shift A modulation method of data transmission through the conversion or modulation and keying (QPSK) the phase determination of the reference signals (carrier). It is also called the fourth period or 4-phase PSK or 4-PSK. QPSK uses four dots in the star diagram. The four dots are evenly distributed on a circle. On these phases, each QPSK character can perform twobit coding and display the codes in Gray code on graph with the minimum BER. quality of service (QoS) A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel. Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a service provider to meet the demands of users. R RADIUS RAI RDI RED REG REI RF RIP RMEP RNC ROPA RP RPR RS232 See Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. remote alarm indication remote defect indication See random early detection. See regenerator. remote error indication See radio frequency. See Routing Information Protocol. remote maintenance association end point See radio network controller. See remote optical pumping amplifier. rendezvous point resilient packet ring A asynchronous transfer mode that does not involve hand-shaking signal. It can communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s. The specification that defines the electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits. The interface can change to RS232 via the hardware jumper and others are the same as RS232. See received signal level. regenerator section overhead See received signal strength indicator. regenerator section termination See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. radio transmission node See Real-Time Transport Protocol.
RS422
RSL RSOH RSSI RST RSTP RTN RTP
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
337
A Glossary
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol. A type of host-to-host protocol used in real-time multimedia services such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and video.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized Dial-In User Service access control mechanism. RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as its (RADIUS) transmission protocol to ensure real-time quality. RADIUS also supports the retransmission and multi-server mechanisms to ensure good reliability. RoHS Routing Information Protocol (RIP) restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth. A type of electric current in the wireless network using AC antennas to create an electromagnetic field. It is the abbreviation of high-frequency AC electromagnetic wave. The AC with the frequency lower than 1 kHz is called low-frequency current. The AC with frequency higher than 10 kHz is called high-frequency current. RF can be classified into such high-frequency current. A piece of equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of the radio resources. An empirical mathematical formulation for the characterization of radio wave propagation as a function of frequency, distance and other conditions. A single model is usually developed to predict the behavior of propagation for all similar links under similar constraints.
radio frequency (RF)
radio network controller (RNC) radio propagation model
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according (RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented. rate limiting A traffic management technology used to limit the total rate of packet sending on a physical interface or a Tunnel interface. Rate limiting is directly enabled on the interface to control the traffic passing the interface. A parameter intended for real-time applications, such as compressed voice over IP (VoIP) and video conferencing. The rt-VBR is characterized by a peak cell rate (PCR), sustained cell rate (SCR), and maximum burst size (MBS). You can expect the source device to transmit in bursts and at a rate that varies with time. To start the system again. Programs or data will be reloaded to all boards. The signal level at a receiver input terminal.
real-time variable bit rate (rt-VBR)
reboot received signal level (RSL)
received signal strength The received wide band power, including thermal noise and noise generated in the indicator (RSSI) receiver, within the bandwidth defined by the receiver pulse shaping filter, for TDD within a specified timeslot. The reference point for the measurement shall be the antenna receiver sensitivity recognition The minimum acceptable value of average received power at point R to achieve a 1 x 10-12 BER (The FEC is open). Consumer awareness of having seen or heard an advertising message.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
338
A Glossary
reference clock reflectance regeneration regenerator (REG) relay
A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks for reference. The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power. The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits. A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals. An electronic control device that has a control system and a system to be controlled. The relay of the telepresence system is used to control the power of telepresence equipment and is controlled by the telepresence host. A remote optical amplifier subsystem designed for applications where power supply and monitoring systems are unavailable. The ROPA subsystem is a power compensation solution to the ultra-long distance long hop (LHP) transmission. An action that the charging module performs to freeze a subscriber's balance amount, free resources, credits, or quotas before the subscriber uses services. This action ensures that the subscriber has sufficient balance to pay for services. The ability to impede (resist) the flow of electric current. With the exception of superconductors, all substances have a greater or lesser degree of resistance. Substances with very low resistance, such as metals, conduct electricity well and are called conductors. Substances with very high resistance, such as glass and rubber, conduct electricity poorly and are called nonconductors or insulators. A physical resource belonging to two or more protection subnetworks. A message that is returned to the requester to notify the requester of the status of the request packet. The ability of a system to maintain function even with changes in internal structure or external environment. A return to a previous condition through cancellation of a certain operation. An alarm directly caused by anomaly events or faults in the network. Some lower-level alarms always accompany a root alarm. The path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically. A device on the network layer that selects routes in the network. The router selects the optimal route according to the destination address of the received packet through a network and forwards the packet to the next router. The last router is responsible for sending the packet to the destination host. Can be used to connect a LAN to a LAN, a WAN to a WAN, or a LAN to the Internet. The determination of a path that a data unit (frame, packet, message) traverses from source to destination. A formula used by routers to determine the appropriate path onto which data should be forwarded. See real-time variable bit rate.
remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) reservation
resistance
resource sharing response robustness rollback root alarm route router
routing routing protocol rt-VBR S
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
339
A Glossary
S1 byte
A byte to transmit network synchronization status information. On an SDH network, each NE traces hop by hop to the same clock reference source through a specific clock synchronization path, realizing synchronization on the entire network. If a clock reference source traced by an NE is missing, this NE will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol. storage area network Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet square connector sustainable cell rate See signal degrade. A signal degrade trigger flag that determines whether to perform a switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network management system. See standard definition-serial digital interface signal. See synchronous digital hierarchy. serious disturbance period See synchronous dynamic random access memory. safety extra-low voltage synchronous equipment management function severely errored second SDH equipment timing source See signal fail. small form-factor pluggable See Secure File Transfer Protocol. See single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line. side mode suppression ratio subnetwork connection subnetwork connection multipath protection subnetwork connection protection subnetwork connection tunnel protection See Simple Network Management Protocol. See signal-to-noise ratio. section overhead See synchronous optical network.
SAN SAToP SC SCR SD SD trigger flag SD-SDI SDH SDP SDRAM SELV SEMF SES SETS SF SFP SFTP SHDSL SMSR SNC SNCMP SNCP SNCTP SNMP SNR SOH SONET
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
340
A Glossary
SPE SSL SSM SSMB SSU STD STP SVC Secure File Transfer Protocol (SFTP) Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
See superstratum provider edge. See Secure Sockets Layer. See Synchronization Status Message. synchronization status message byte synchronization supply unit system target decoder Spanning Tree Protocol switched virtual connection A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH. A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned entities. A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the transmission of management information between any two points. The polling mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link. Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock Message (SSM) information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff, and forward the synchronization information to downstream nodes. security Protection of a computer system and its data from harm or loss. A major focus of computer security, especially on systems accessed by many people or through communication lines, is preventing system access by unauthorized individuals. A service, provided by a layer of communicating open systems, which ensures adequate security of the systems or of data transfer. A function of establishing a replacement connection by network without the network management connection function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that time. An input/output location (channel) that sends and receives data to and from a computer's CPU or a communications device one bit at a time. Serial ports are used for serial data communication and as interfaces with some peripheral devices, such as mice and printers. An MAC-layer-based unidirectional transmission service. It is used to transmit data packets, and is characterized by a set of QoS parameters, such as latency, jitter, and throughput. The level of service quality of an evaluated party in a specified period, determined by an evaluating party. A measure that ensures that services can be received at the receive end.
security service self-healing
serial port
service flow
service level service protection
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
341
A Glossary
session
A logical connection between two nodes on a network for the exchange of data. It generally can apply to any link between any two data devices. A session is also used simply to describe the connection time. A process of delaying packets within a traffic stream to cause it to conform to specific defined traffic profile. A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect condition is active. A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (non-degrade defect) is active. The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and is usually expressed in dB (Decibel). The information exchange concerning the establishment and control of a telecommunication circuit and the management of the network.
shaping signal degrade (SD) signal fail (SF) signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) signaling
single-ended switching A protection operation method that takes switching action only at the affected end of the protected entity (for example, trail, subnetwork connection), in the case of a unidirectional failure. single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) A symmetric digital subscriber line technology developed from HDSL, SDSL, and HDSL2, which is defined in ITU-T G.991.2. The SHDSL port is connected to the user terminal through the plain telephone subscriber line and uses trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation (TC-PAM) technology to transmit high-speed data and provide the broadband access service. An antenna intended to radiate or receive radio waves with only one specified polarization. Dividing data into the information units proper for transmission. Process of upgrading the system files without service interruption The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies according to transmission system type. Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
single-polarized antenna slicing smooth upgrade span
standard definitionserial digital interface signal (SD-SDI) static ARP static route
A protocol that binds some IP addresses to a specified gateway. The packet of these IP addresses must be forwarded through this gateway. A route that cannot adapt to the change of network topology. Operators must configure it manually. When a network topology is simple, the network can work in the normal state if only the static route is configured. It can improve network performance and ensure bandwidth for important applications. Its disadvantage is as follows: When a network is faulty or the topology changes, the static route does not change automatically. It must be changed by the operators.
statistical multiplexing A multiplexing technique whereby information from multiple logical channels can be transmitted across a single physical channel. It dynamically allocates bandwidth only to active input channels, to make better use of available bandwidth and allow more devices to be connected than with other multiplexing techniques.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
342
A Glossary
steering
A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packetbased T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH transoceanic multiplex section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the source and sink nodes of a service. The force, or combination of forces, which produces a strain; force exerted in any direction or manner between contiguous bodies, or parts of bodies, and taking specific names according to its direction, or mode of action, as thrust or pressure, pull or tension, shear or tangential stress. A type of smaller networks that form a larger network according to a rule, for example, according to different districts. This facilitates the management of the large network. The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine, server or router matches with the IP address.
stress
subnet subnet mask
superstratum provider Core devices that are located within a VPLS full-meshed network. The UPE devices that edge (SPE) are connected with the SPE devices are similar to the CE devices. The PWs set up between the UPE devices and the SPE devices serve as the ACs of the SPE devices. The SPE devices must learn the MAC addresses of all the sites on UPE side and those of the UPE interfaces that are connected with the SPE. SPE is sometimes called NPE. suppress suspension switching capacity To forbid the printing of the paper bill of an account that meets certain conditions during the bill run. A specific state in the life cycle of a subscriber. A subscriber in this state can neither make calls nor receive calls. The backplane bandwidth or switching bandwidth. The switching capacity is the maximum data that can be processed by the interface processor of a switch and the data bus. The backplane bandwidth indicates the overall data switching capability of a switch, in Gbit/s. A priority of a board that is defined for protection switching. When several protected boards need to be switched, a switching priority should be set for each board. If the switching priorities of the boards are the same, services on the board that fails later cannot be switched. Services on the board with higher priority can preempt the switching resources of that with lower priority. A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode, transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is used only for signals. SDH is suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
switching priority
synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)
synchronous dynamic A new type of DRAM that can run at much higher clock speeds than conventional random access memory memory. SDRAM actually synchronizes itself with the CPU's bus and is capable of running at 100 MHz, about three times faster than conventional FPM RAM, and about (SDRAM) twice as fast as EDO DRAM or BEDO DRAM. SDRAM is replacing EDO DRAM in computers. synchronous optical network (SONET) A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
343
A Glossary
T TCA TCI TCM TCN TCP TCP/IP TDC TDM TE TFTP TIM TLV TM TMN TOD TPID TPS TPS protection See threshold crossing alarm. tag control information tandem connection monitor topology change notification See Transmission Control Protocol. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol tunable dispersion compensator See time division multiplexing. terminal equipment See Trivial File Transfer Protocol. trace identifier mismatch See type-length-value. See terminal multiplexer. See telecommunications management network. time of day tag protocol identifier See tributary protection switching. The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N tributary boards. When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to the specified protection board and the protection board takes over as the working board. After the fault is rectified, the service is automatically switched to the original board. trail signal degrade trail trace identifier See time to live. See trail termination source identifier. tributary unit tributary unit loss of pointer tributary unit group committed rate measurement interval A standard terminal emulation protocol in the TCP/IP protocol stack. Telnet allows users to log in to remote systems and use resources as if they were connected to a local system. Telnet is defined in RFC 854. type of service
TSD TTI TTL TTSI TU TU-LOP TUG Tc Telnet
ToS
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
344
A Glossary
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model. A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines. A congestion management mechanism, in which packets arrive later are discarded when the queue is full. This policy of discarding packets may result in network-wide synchronization due to the TCP slow startup mechanism. A concept borrowed from geometry. Two tangent rings have a common node between them. The common node often leads to single-point failures. A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation, maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks and services. A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals into multiple channels of low rate signals. An amount, limit or level on a scale. Changes will occur with a threshold reached. The alarm occurs when the monitored value exceeds the threshold. An alarm generated when a threshold is crossed. The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection, service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with bandwidth. The data input/output capability of the data transmission interface. A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over one channel. A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly. The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL value when the packet arrives, and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero. Symbolic representation for a timer object (for example, a timer object may have a primitive designated as T-Start Request). Various MAC entities utilize timer entities that provide triggers for certain MAC state transitions. The current time of an event that is recorded by a computer. By using mechanisms such as the Network Time Protocol (NTP), a computer maintains accurate current time, calibrated to minute fractions of a second.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
tail drop
tangent ring telecommunications management network (TMN) terminal multiplexer (TM) threshold threshold alarm threshold crossing alarm (TCA) throughput throughput capability time division multiplexing (TDM)
time to live (TTL)
timer
timestamp
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
345
A Glossary
token bucket algorithm The token bucket is a container for tokens. The capacity of a token bucket is limited, and the number of tokens determines the traffic rate of permitted packets. The token bucket polices the traffic. Users place the tokens into the bucket regularly according to the preset rate. If the tokens in the bucket exceed the capacity, no tokens can be put in. Packets can be forwarded when the bucket has tokens, otherwise they cannot be transferred till there are new tokens in the bucket. This scheme adjusts the rate of packet input. topology topology discovery trTCM traceroute The configuration or layout of a network formed by the connections between devices on a local area network (LAN) or between two or more LANs. A technique to accurately determine the exact layout of a network using a few assumptions about the network architecture and simple tools. See two rate three color marker. A program that prints the path to a destination. Traceroute sends a sequence of datagrams with the time-to-live (TTL) set to 1,2, and so on, and uses ICMP time exceeded messages that return to determine routers along the path. The product of the number of calls made and received and the average duration of each call in a measurement period. A function that enables you to classify traffic into different classes with different priorities according to some criteria. Each class of traffic has a specified QoS in the entire network. In this way, different traffic packets can be treated differently. A full set of QoS policies formed by association of traffic classification and QoS actions. A way of controlling the network traffic from a computer to optimize or guarantee the performance and minimize the delay. It actively adjusts the output speed of traffic in the scenario that the traffic matches network resources provided by the lower layer devices, avoiding packet loss and congestion. An activity of measuring and collecting statistics of various data on devices and telecommunications networks. With the statistics, operators can be aware of the operating status, signaling, users, system resource usage of the devices or networks. The statistics also help the operators manage the device operating, locate problems, monitor and maintain the networks, and plan the networks. A network level management function of the network management system. This function enables you to configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report.
traffic traffic classification
traffic policy traffic shaping
traffic statistics
trail management function
trail termination source A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the connectivity identifier (TTSI) verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect. transaction transfer transit transit node transmission delay A business between a carrier and customer, such as payment and account adjustment. A process of transferring the account balance of an account to another account. A packet is transmitted along an LSP consisting of a series of LSRs after the packet is labeled. The intermediate nodes are named transits. All the nodes except the master node on an RRPP ring. The period from the time when a site starts to transmit a data frame to the time when the site finishes the data frame transmission. It consists of the transmission latency and the equipment forwarding latency.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
A Glossary
transmit power control A technical mechanism used within some networking devices in order to prevent too much unwanted interference between different wireless networks. transparent transmission transport profile for multiprotocol label switching (MPLS-TP) tray tributary loopback A process during which the signaling protocol or data is not processed in the content but encapsulated in the format for the processing of the next phase. MPLS-TP is an extension to MPLS in terms of forwarding, OAM, reliability, NMS and control plane protocol standardized by IETF to provide sufficient transport functionality. A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices. A fault can be located for each service path by performing loopback to each path of the tributary board. There are three kinds of loopback modes: no loopback, outloop, and inloop. A function that uses a standby tributary processing board to protect N tributary processing boards. Physical communications line between two offices. It transports media signals such as speech, data and video signals. A link used to transport VLAN communication between two switches. A switch port used to connect to other switches. The trunk port can connect to only the trunk link. Only VLANs allowed to pass through a trunk port can be configured on the trunk port. A channel on the packet switching network that transmits service traffic between PEs. In VPN, a tunnel is an information transmission channel between two entities. The tunnel ensures secure and transparent transmission of VPN information. In most cases, a tunnel is an MPLS tunnel. A group of information, including the token, slot number of an outgoing interface, tunnel type, and location method. A type of cable that consists of two independently insulated wires twisted around one another for the purposes of canceling out electromagnetic interference which can cause crosstalk. The number of twists per meter makes up part of the specifications for a given type of cable. The greater the number of twists is, the more crosstalk is reduced. An algorithm that meters an IP packet stream and marks its packets based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate (CIR), and their associated burst sizes to be either green, yellow, or red. A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or does not exceed the CIR. An encoding type that features high efficiency and expansibility. It is also called CodeLength-Value (CLV). T indicates that different types can be defined through different values. L indicates the total length of the value field. V indicates the actual data of the TLV and is most important. TLV encoding features high expansibility. New TLVs can be added to support new features, which is flexible in describing information loaded in packets.
tributary protection switching (TPS) trunk trunk link trunk port
tunnel
tunnel ID twisted pair cable
two rate three color marker (trTCM)
type-length-value (TLV)
U UART UAS universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter unavailable second
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
347
A Glossary
UAT UBR UBR+ UDP UNI UPC UPE UPI UPM UPS UTC User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
See unavailable time event. unspecified bit rate Unspecified Bit Rate Plus See User Datagram Protocol. See user-to-network interface. See usage parameter control. user-end provider edge user payload identifier uninterruptible power module uninterruptible power supply See Coordinated Universal Time. A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP to deliver datagram. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery service. There is a possibility that UDP messages will be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of order. The destination device does not confirm whether a data packet is received.
unavailable time event An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely (UAT) errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds. unicast unknown multicast packet uplink uplink tunnel upload upper limit The process of sending data from a source to a single recipient. A packet for which no forwarding entry is found in the multicast forwarding table. A transmission channel through which radio signals or other signals are transmitted to the central office. GTP Tunnel from the Mobile Node to the SGSN. An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS. The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored at the NMS side. The maximum consumption amount that a carrier sets for a subscriber in a bill cycle. If the consumption amount if a subscriber exceeds the maximum consumption amount that the carrier sets, the OCS still deducts the maximum consumption amount that the carrier sets. In an access network, the direction that is far from the subscriber end of the link. A board that provides the upstream transmission function. Through an upstream board, services can be transmitted upstream to the upper-layer device. During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network interface.
upstream upstream board usage parameter control (UPC)
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
348
A Glossary
user-to-network interface (UNI) V V-NNI V-UNI V.24 VAS VB VBR VC trunk VCC VCCV VCG VCI VCTRUNK VIP VLAN VLAN mapping
The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for example, ATM switches).
virtual network-network interface See virtual user-network interface. The physical layer interface specification between DTE and DCE defined by the ITUT. It complies with EIA/TIA-232. See value-added service. virtual bridge See variable bit rate. See virtual container trunk. See virtual channel connection. virtual circuit connectivity verification See virtual concatenation group. virtual channel identifier A virtual concatenation group applied in data service mapping, also called the internal port of a data service processing board. very important person virtual local area network A technology that enables user packets to be transmitted over the public network by translating private VLAN tags into public VLAN tags. When user packets arrive at the destination private network, VLAN mapping translates public VLAN tags back into private VLAN tags. In this manner, user packets are correctly transmitted to the destination. One of the properties of the MST region, which describes mappings between VLANs and spanning tree instances. A technology that adds a VLAN tag to each incoming packet. The VLAN stacking technology implements transparent transmission of C-VLANs in the ISP network to realize the application of Layer 2 Virtual Private Network (VPN). See virtual path. See virtual path identifier. See virtual private LAN service. virtual private network See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. virtual switch interface
VLAN mapping table VLAN stacking
VP VPI VPLS VPN VRRP VSI
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
349
A Glossary
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP)
A protocol used for multicast or multicast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the network. See voice over IP. A service provided by carriers and service providers (SPs) together for subscribers based on voice, data, images, SMS messages, and so on. Communication network technologies, computer technologies, and Internet technologies are used to provide value-added services.
VoIP value-added service (VAS)
variable bit rate (VBR) One of the traffic classes used by ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode). Unlike a permanent CBR (Constant Bit Rate) channel, a VBR data stream varies in bandwidth and is better suited to non real time transfers than to real-time streams such as voice calls. virtual channel connection (VCC) virtual circuit A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A pointto-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple end points. A channel or circuit established between two points on a data communications network with packet switching. Virtual circuits can be permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) or switched virtual circuits (SVCs) . A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same virtual concatenation link
virtual concatenation group (VCG)
virtual container trunk The logical path formed by some cascaded VCs. (VC trunk) virtual fiber virtual path (VP) virtual path identifier (VPI) virtual private LAN service (VPLS) virtual user-network interface (V-UNI) voice over IP (VoIP) The fiber that is created between different devices. A virtual fiber represents the optical path that bears SDH services in a WDM system. A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM network based on a common VPI. The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to which virtual path the cell belongs. A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN. A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service classification and traffic control in HQoS. An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the public switched telephone network (PSTN). The voltage developed across a component or conductor by the flow of current through the resistance or impedance of that component or conductor.
voltage drop
W WAN See wide area network.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
350
A Glossary
WCDMA WDM WFQ WLAN WRED WRR WTR Web LCT Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) wait to restore (WTR) wavelength wavelength protection group weighted fair queuing (WFQ)
See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access. wavelength division multiplexing See weighted fair queuing. See wireless local area network. See weighted random early detection. weighted round robin See wait to restore. The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located at the NE management layer of the transport network. A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology. The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line. The distance between successive peaks or troughs in a traveling wave, that is, the distance over which a wave is transmitted within a vibration period. Data for describing the wavelength protection structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet for SDH NEs. The wavelength path protection can work only with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP detection (WRED) synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio. wide area network (WAN) wireless local area network (WLAN) working path working service wrapping A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a province, a state or even a country. A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional LAN. A path allocated to transport the normal traffic. A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working. A protection switching mode defined in ITU-T G.8132, which is applicable to packetbased T-MPLS ring networks and similar to SDH two-fiber bidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP). In this mode, the switching is triggered by the node that detects a failure. For details, see ITU-T G.841.
X X.21 ITU-T standard for serial communications over synchronous digital lines. It is mainly used in Europe and Japan.
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
351
A Glossary
X.25
A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network (PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
Y Y.1731 The OAM protocol introduced by the ITU-T. Besides the contents defined by IEEE802.1ag, ITU-T Recommendation Y.173 also defines the following combined OAM messages: Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), Remote Defect Indication (RDI), Locked Signal (LCK), Test Signal, Automatic Protection Switching (APS), Maintenance Communication Channel (MCC), Experimental (EXP), and Vendor Specific (VSP) for fault management and performance monitoring, such as frame loss measurement (LM), and delay measurement (DM).
Issue 01 (2012-10-31)
352

OSN 550 V100R006C01 Hardware Description 01

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Descrição original:

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

OSN 550 V100R006C01 Hardware Description 01

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

OptiX OSN 550 Multi-Service CPE Optical Transmission System V100R006C01

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

About This Document

About This Document

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-10-31) Based on Product Version V100R006C01

Updates in Issue 01 (2012-04-30) Based on Product Version V100R006C00

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 System Control, Switching, and Timing Boards...................................................................18

4 Packet Processing Boards...........................................................................................................77

11 Outdoor Cabinet......................................................................................................................240 12 Filler Panel................................................................................................................................243

13 Optical Attenuators.................................................................................................................246 14 Pluggable Optical Modules...................................................................................................248

15 Pluggable electrical Modules................................................................................................269 16 Cables.........................................................................................................................................271

17 Parameter Settings...................................................................................................................293 A Glossary......................................................................................................................................294

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Chassis Structure and Board Installation Area

Board installation area

1 Power supply boards 2

Extended boards System control, switching, and timing boards

Fan warning label

Power caution label

CLASS1 LASER PRODUCT

Laser safety class label

Qualification card label

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Label Name Product nameplate label

Description Indicates the product name and certification.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

Boards and Their Appearances

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

2.1 Board List

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

Board Classificat ion

Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXX

Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

Board Classificat ion

Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXL G

Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

Board Classificat ion

Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXG A

Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances

Board Classificat ion

Board Acron ym TNM1 PCXG B

Valid Slot Slots 7 and 8

System control, switching, and timing board (TDM)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Boards and Their Appearances